WO2011111691A1 - Display device - Google Patents

Display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011111691A1
WO2011111691A1 PCT/JP2011/055345 JP2011055345W WO2011111691A1 WO 2011111691 A1 WO2011111691 A1 WO 2011111691A1 JP 2011055345 W JP2011055345 W JP 2011055345W WO 2011111691 A1 WO2011111691 A1 WO 2011111691A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display area
image
image display
display
photoelectric conversion
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/055345
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
千幸 神徳
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2011111691A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011111691A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/40Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character is selected from a number of characters arranged one beside the other, e.g. on a common carrier plate
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F24HEATING; RANGES; VENTILATING
    • F24SSOLAR HEAT COLLECTORS; SOLAR HEAT SYSTEMS
    • F24S30/00Arrangements for moving or orienting solar heat collector modules
    • F24S30/40Arrangements for moving or orienting solar heat collector modules for rotary movement
    • F24S30/42Arrangements for moving or orienting solar heat collector modules for rotary movement with only one rotation axis
    • F24S30/425Horizontal axis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F11/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position
    • G09F11/02Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position the display elements being secured to rotating members, e.g. drums, spindles
    • G09F11/025Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the complete information is permanently attached to a movable support which brings it to the display position the display elements being secured to rotating members, e.g. drums, spindles the members being rotated simultaneously, each face of the member carrying a part of the sign
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F27/00Combined visual and audible advertising or displaying, e.g. for public address
    • G09F27/007Displays with power supply provided by solar cells or photocells
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • G09F9/35Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements being liquid crystals
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02EREDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/40Solar thermal energy, e.g. solar towers
    • Y02E10/47Mountings or tracking

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a display device.
  • This specification includes the contents described in the specification and / or drawings of Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-056283, which is the basis of the priority of the present application.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses that a relatively large liquid crystal display device is put into practical use for a television, an information display, a billboard display, and the like.
  • a display device installed outdoors becomes difficult to see depending on the time zone due to, for example, reflection of sunlight.
  • a time zone when the screen is difficult to see due to sunlight, it may be useless even if the display device functions as an information display for displaying information.
  • the display device when installed on the street, it may not be necessary to display information depending on the time of day.
  • the display device when installed in a place where there is a large difference in traffic due to the time zone, the display device may function as an information display in a time zone where there is a lot of traffic. It may not be necessary to function as an information display.
  • a large information display increases power consumption. For this reason, it is demanded to save power of the information display.
  • the present invention proposes, for example, a display device that can use the display area more effectively in the above situation.
  • the newly proposed display device includes a display panel for displaying an image; a photoelectric conversion panel for converting received light into electric power; and a display panel facing the front of the device in a predetermined region on the front of the device A switching mechanism that switches between a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus.
  • the display panel can be made to function as an information display by facing the front of the apparatus.
  • power can be generated by switching to a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is arranged toward the front surface of the apparatus. The generated power can be used as power for causing the information display to function, for example, by storing it in a storage battery.
  • the display panel and the photoelectric conversion panel may be arranged around a rotation axis provided so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the front of the apparatus.
  • the switching mechanism may switch between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus by rotating the rotation shaft.
  • the image display area variable display a plurality of display devices are arranged so that the display panel can constitute one screen. Then, by controlling the switching mechanism of the display device, the state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the device and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the device are switched. As a result, an image display area constituted by a plurality of display devices is changed.
  • the display device is arranged with the display panel facing the front of the device in a predetermined area.
  • the switching mechanism may switch between a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel overlaps the front side of the display panel and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is shifted from the front side of the display panel in a predetermined region.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel is arranged facing the front of the device in a predetermined region.
  • the switching mechanism may switch between a state where the display panel overlaps the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel and a state shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel in a predetermined region.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display device.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display device.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a substantially triangular prism frame of the display device.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display device.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a control flow of the display device.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another display device.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing another image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 17 shows another image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing another image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating another display device.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating another display device.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing another display device.
  • FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing another display device.
  • FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating another display device.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing another display device.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram showing another display device.
  • FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a control flow of the image display area variable display.
  • FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a control flow of
  • the display device 10 includes a display panel 11, a photoelectric conversion panel 12, and a switching mechanism 13, as shown in FIG.
  • the display panel 11 is a panel that displays an image.
  • various flat panel displays such as a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display, can be used, for example.
  • the display panel 11 may be a panel that displays an image, and is not limited to various flat panel displays such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display that can change an image displayed by an electrical action, but a predetermined display. May be a panel (for example, a poster) on which is drawn.
  • the display panel 11 uses various flat panel displays capable of changing an image displayed by an electrical action.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is a panel that converts received light into electric power. As this photoelectric conversion panel 12, it can comprise with the panel in which the photoelectric conversion element was mounted, for example, the panel for photovoltaic power generation is employable.
  • the photoelectric conversion element used for the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is formed of a tandem thin film solar cell in which an amorphous silicon layer and a microcrystalline silicon layer are stacked.
  • the amorphous silicon layer includes an a-Si: Hp layer, an a-Si: Hi layer, and an a-Si: Hn layer.
  • the microcrystalline silicon layer includes a ⁇ c-Si: Hp layer, a ⁇ c-Si: Hi layer, and a ⁇ c-Si: Hn layer.
  • the structure of the photoelectric conversion element is not limited to this.
  • Such a photoelectric conversion element can be produced, for example, by decomposing gaseous silicon by plasma discharge in a plasma CVD apparatus and laminating a thin silicon film on a transparent substrate.
  • Such a photoelectric conversion element can utilize a silicon thin film technology necessary for manufacturing a liquid crystal panel. For this reason, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 and the display panel 11 can achieve sharing of production facilities and can be efficiently produced.
  • the structure of the photoelectric conversion element is not limited to the above, and various forms of structures such as a single-junction cell, a monolithic multi-junction cell, and a mechanical stack type in which various solar cells having different wavelength sensitivity regions are connected are applied. can do.
  • the photoelectric conversion element is not limited to a thin film type, and may be a crystal type element.
  • the photoelectric conversion element may be provided with an appropriate antireflection film on the surface of the photoelectric conversion element in order to reduce the light reflectance in the sensitivity wavelength region.
  • a UV reflection film, an infrared reflection film, or the like that reflects light in a wavelength region other than the sensitivity wavelength region of the photoelectric conversion element may be provided.
  • This display device 10 is provided with a rotation axis d so as to be orthogonal to a straight line L extending toward the front surface Fr of the device.
  • a display panel 11 and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged around the rotation axis d.
  • the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged along the side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d.
  • the display device 10 includes a substantially triangular prism frame 20 as illustrated in FIGS. 3 and 4, for example.
  • beam members 23 to 25 are bridged between corners of substantially triangular support plates 21 and 22 arranged on both sides of the frame body 20.
  • the substantially triangular support plates 21 and 22 arranged on both sides are provided with a rotation axis d toward the outside.
  • the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged on the peripheral side surface of the frame body 20.
  • the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are attached to the beam members 23 to 25 (see FIGS. 1 and 3).
  • the display device 10 when an image is to be displayed in a predetermined area of the device front surface Fr, the display device 10 is displayed with the display panel 11 facing the device front surface Fr. It is good to arrange.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 when it is desired to generate electric power by photoelectric conversion, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be arranged facing the apparatus front surface Fr. When the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be inclined at an appropriate angle with respect to the device front surface Fr according to the height of the sun.
  • the switching mechanism 13 switches between a state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr in a predetermined region of the device front surface Fr.
  • Mechanism. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the switching mechanism 13 rotates the rotation axis d so that the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr, and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is the device. The state of being arranged toward the front surface Fr can be switched.
  • the display device 10 includes the display panel 11 for displaying an image; the photoelectric conversion panel 12 for converting received light into electric power; and the display panel 11 in the predetermined region of the device front surface Fr. And a switching mechanism 13 for switching between a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the apparatus front surface Fr.
  • the display panel 11 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr, and as shown in FIG. 2, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr. It is possible to appropriately switch between these states.
  • the display device 10 can be placed outdoors, for example. In this case, depending on the time of day, there may be a case where the screen of the display panel 11 becomes difficult to see due to strong sunlight hitting the front surface Fr. Further, in such a time zone, power generation using sunlight can be performed efficiently, but the displayed image is difficult to see. According to such a display device 10, in a time zone in which sunlight is strongly applied and the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 2, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr to generate power. be able to. On the other hand, in a time zone in which the screen is easy to see on the device front surface Fr, as shown in FIG. 1, the display panel 11 can be arranged facing the device front surface Fr on the device front surface Fr to display an image. Thus, the display device 10 can be used in an appropriate manner depending on the situation of the device front surface Fr.
  • the display panel 11 can be made to function as an information display by facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • power can be generated by directing the photoelectric conversion panel 12 toward the device front surface Fr.
  • the electric power generated by the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be stored in a storage battery (not shown), and can be used as information display power.
  • the display device 10 includes a switching control unit 13 a that controls the switching mechanism 13.
  • the display device 10 includes a light receiving sensor 13 a 1 that receives external light emitted toward the device front surface Fr.
  • the switching control unit 13a is configured to control the switching mechanism 13 based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 13a1.
  • the display device control method includes, for example, a light reception information acquisition step of acquiring light reception information by the light reception sensor 13a1, a state in which the display panel 11 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr, and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 on the device front surface Fr. It is good to provide the switching step which switches the state arranged toward.
  • the switching step may be performed based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step.
  • the switching control unit 13a detects the intensity of light irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr based on the light reception information, and the detected light intensity is higher than a predetermined value (threshold A).
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be controlled so as to be disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Thereby, when sunlight hits the apparatus front surface Fr strongly and it becomes difficult to see the screen of the display panel 11, it can arrange
  • the display panel 11 When the intensity of light detected by the light receiving sensor 13a1 is lower than a predetermined value (threshold value B), the display panel 11 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and an image is displayed on the display panel 11.
  • the display device 10 may be controlled so as to be displayed.
  • the display panel 11 can be arranged facing the device front surface Fr to display an image.
  • the switching control unit 13a controls the switching mechanism 13 based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 13a1
  • a shadow may be generated on the apparatus front surface Fr due to some influence.
  • the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be unnecessarily switched when the light reception information detected by the light reception sensor 13a1 changes due to a shadow on the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the threshold value A set when switching the panel arranged toward the apparatus front surface Fr from the display panel 11 to the photoelectric conversion panel 12 and the threshold value B set when switching from the photoelectric conversion panel 12 to the display panel 11 Should be set to different values.
  • a timer may be further set so that the state is maintained for a certain period after the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are switched. Thereby, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be switched stably.
  • Timer 13a2 As another configuration of the switching control unit 13a, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the display device 10 includes a state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr, and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 in the device front surface Fr.
  • positioned toward may be set may be provided.
  • the timer 13a2 sets the timing for switching between the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr. Good.
  • the switching control unit 13a controls the switching mechanism 13 based on the timer 13a2, so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is in a time zone in which sunlight is strongly applied to the front surface Fr and the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see. Can be arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Then, at the timing set in the timer 13a2, it is possible to switch from the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr to the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of such control.
  • the current time (t) is acquired from the clock function incorporated in the display device 10 (S1).
  • the acquired current time (t) is included in the time zone (t1 to t2) set in the timer 13a2 as the time zone in which sunlight hits the front surface Fr of the apparatus and the screen of the display panel 11 becomes difficult to see.
  • T ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ (t1 to t2)) is determined (S2).
  • the current time (t) is included in the time zone (t1 to t2) in which the screen on the display panel 11 is difficult to see due to strong sunlight hitting the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the determination process (S2) when it is determined that the acquired current time (t) is not included in the time zone (t1 to t2) set in the timer 13a2 (NO), the determination process In (S3), when it is determined that the light reception information (v) obtained by the light reception sensor 13a1 is not higher than the threshold value (v1) (NO), the display panel 11 is arranged facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus. (S5). Then, the processes of S1 to S5 are repeated.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is controlled so as to be arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the control for example, even in the time zone (t1 to t2) set by the timer 13a2 as a time zone in which the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see due to sunlight, the influence of sunlight is affected on a cloudy day. If it is weak, the display panel 11 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Thereby, an image can be displayed on the display panel 11.
  • the control for switching between the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the apparatus front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the apparatus front surface Fr more appropriate control according to the situation becomes possible. .
  • the control by the timer 13a2 can change the display contents when there are many people viewing the display device 10 and when the age group and gender of the viewers are different depending on the time zone.
  • the age group and sex of the person who views the display device 10 may differ depending on holidays, weekdays, and time zones.
  • the display panel 11 is controlled to be arranged on the front surface Fr of the device according to a preset day of the week or time, and an image suitable for the age group and gender of the person who views the display device 10 is displayed on the display panel 11. Can be displayed.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be appropriately disposed on the front surface Fr of the device.
  • FIG. 6 shows another display device 10A.
  • the display device 10 ⁇ / b> A has the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 overlapped with the display surface 11 a 1 of the display panel 11 and the light receiving surface 12 a 1 of the photoelectric conversion panel 12 facing outward. Yes.
  • the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are stacked so as to sandwich the rotation axis d.
  • a unit in which the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are stacked may be rotated around the rotation axis d.
  • the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr can be switched. it can.
  • the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are overlapped so that the display surface 11a1 of the display panel 11 and the light receiving surface 12a1 of the photoelectric conversion panel 12 face each other. It can be realized with a simple configuration.
  • Display device 10B >> 7 and 8 show another display device 10B.
  • the display device 10 ⁇ / b> B includes a display panel 11, a photoelectric conversion panel 12, and a condensing lens 16 that collects light toward the photoelectric conversion panel 12 around the rotation axis d. Yes.
  • the display panel 11 is arranged along at least one side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d.
  • the condenser lens 16 is disposed along the other side surface of the triangular prism.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged at the corner inside the triangular prism facing the condenser lens 16. The light receiving surface of the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is directed to the condenser lens 16.
  • the switching mechanism 13 rotates the rotation axis d as shown in FIG. 8, and the display panel 11 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and the condensing lens 16 as shown in FIG. Is switched to the state of being arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the condenser lens 16 In a state where the condenser lens 16 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, the light collected by the condenser lens 16 enters the photoelectric conversion panel 12.
  • the condenser lens 16 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, as shown in FIG. 7, the light incident on the condenser lens 16 from the front surface Fr side of the apparatus is collected on the photoelectric conversion panel 12 through the condenser lens 16. It is done. Thereby, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can generate electric power based on the light incident on the condenser lens 16 from the apparatus front surface Fr side.
  • Condenser lens 16 for example, a biconvex lens, a plano-convex lens, or a Fresnel lens can be used.
  • a Fresnel lens having a flat incident surface for receiving sunlight and a substantially triangular cross section for emitting sunlight toward the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is easy to handle in terms of weight, cost, and usage environment.
  • the condenser lens 16 for example, thin glass, weather-resistant acrylic, polycarbonate, or the like generally used for a normal solar cell module (solar power generation system) or the like can be used.
  • the material of the condensing lens 16 is not limited to the above, and these materials may have a multilayer structure.
  • the condensing lens 16 it is preferable to select a condensing lens 16 that has a high transmittance of sensitive wavelength light of a solar cell element used in the photoelectric conversion panel 12 and has weather resistance.
  • an appropriate ultraviolet absorber may be added to these materials for the purpose of preventing ultraviolet degradation of the condenser lens 16 itself and other members.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be made small.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is more expensive than the condenser lens 16. For this reason, compared with the case where the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged on one side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d (see FIG. 2), the display device 10 is manufactured in the form using the condenser lens 16. Cost can be kept low.
  • the display device 10 can be miniaturized, and for example, can be configured as a triangular prism having one side of a triangle on both sides of about several cm (for example, about 1 cm to 5 cm). Then, by arranging a plurality of display devices 10, it is possible to configure an image display area variable display that can change the image display area more finely.
  • Image display area variable display 200 >> 9 and 10 are plan views showing an image display area variable display 200 in which a plurality of display devices 10 are arranged.
  • the image display area variable display 200 has a plurality of display devices 10 arranged so that the display panel can constitute one screen.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes an image display area changing unit 210 that changes an image display area constituted by the plurality of display devices 10.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 controls the switching mechanism 13 of each display device 10. As a result, the image display area changing unit 210 switches between the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr. The image display area of the variable display 200 is changed.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 can set an image display area in an arbitrary area of the image display area variable display 200. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the image display area A can be set on the upper right side of the image display area variable display 200. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the image display area changing unit 210 can set the image display area A at the lower part of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 may control the display device 10 in the image display area A so that the display panel 11 faces the front surface Fr of the device. At this time, outside the image display area A, the display device 10 may be controlled so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 faces the device front surface Fr. Thus, one image can be displayed in the image display area A, and power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panel 12 outside the image display area A.
  • the image display area variable display 200 may include a light receiving sensor 220 that receives external light applied to the apparatus front surface Fr.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 may change the image display area A based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 220.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 is provided on the frame 201 of the image display area variable display 200.
  • FIG. 11 shows another arrangement example of the light receiving sensors 220 of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 may be provided at a plurality of positions on the side surface of the image display area variable display 200 on the apparatus front side Fr side. Thereby, sunlight can be detected at a plurality of positions of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the light receiving sensors 220 are provided at nine locations, that is, the central portion of the image display area variable display 200, up and down, left and right, and a pair of diagonal positions. Thereby, it is possible to detect which position of the image display area variable display 200 is strongly exposed to sunlight.
  • the image display area A (see FIG. 9) can be set at a position suitable for visual recognition with respect to the image display area variable display 200.
  • the light receiving sensors 220 may be provided at a plurality of positions of the image display area variable display 200 and are not limited to the example shown in FIG.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 is arranged so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is placed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus at a position where light reception information exceeding a predetermined reference value is obtained. May be changed. Thereby, since the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be arrange
  • the image display area changing unit 210 when the number of the light receiving sensors 220 from which the light receiving information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained is larger than the predetermined number, You may comprise so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be arrange
  • light reception information exceeding a predetermined reference value may be obtained from many light reception sensors 220 among the plurality of light reception sensors 220 arranged in the image display area changing unit 210.
  • sunlight is generally strongly applied to the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 of all the display apparatuses 10 is arrange
  • the image display area variable display 200 can generate electric power efficiently.
  • the central portion of the image display area variable display 200 is easy to enter the viewer's field of view.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 (c) disposed in the central portion of the image display area variable display 200 exceeds a predetermined reference value, You may control to arrange the photoelectric conversion panels 12 of all the display apparatuses 10 toward the apparatus front surface Fr.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 performs predetermined processing when the light reception information exceeds the reference value when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 continuously exceeds the reference value at a predetermined time. You may comprise so that it may perform.
  • the image display area variable display 200 when the image display area variable display 200 is installed outdoors, a shadow may occur on the image display area variable display 200 due to the influence of clouds or the like even on a sunny day. In this case, the external light irradiated on the image display area variable display 200 is temporarily blocked. When the external light applied to the image display area variable display 200 is temporarily blocked, the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor 220 is temporarily greatly changed. As described above, the luminance of the external light applied to the apparatus front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200 may change rapidly in a short time.
  • the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr are switched each time based on the light reception information that has temporarily changed greatly. It is done. In this way, when the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr are switched each time, the image display area variable display 200 is The image cannot be displayed stably. In this case, the viewer may be stressed and the power generation efficiency is also deteriorated.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 performs predetermined processing when the light reception information exceeds the reference value when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 continuously exceeds the reference value at a predetermined time. By configuring so as to perform the processing, it is possible to prevent the switching of the display device 10 from being performed unnecessarily.
  • the reference value may be set with respect to the difference of the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor at different predetermined timings. In this case, it is possible to switch the display device 10 by reflecting the change over time of the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. According to the image display area changing unit 210, it is possible to prevent the display device 10 from being unnecessarily switched even when the brightness of the external light changes temporarily.
  • the image display area variable display 200 when the image display area variable display 200 is strongly lit by sunlight, the light reception information acquired from the light receiving sensor 220 and the light reception information five minutes before when the shadow is temporarily made under the influence of clouds. The difference is calculated.
  • the sun when the sun is shining strongly, if the shadow is temporarily shaded after 5 minutes, the received light information obtained when the sun is shining strongly and the 5 minutes The difference from the later received light information becomes large. Further, when the shade continues under the influence of the cloud after 5 minutes, the difference between the received light information after 5 minutes and the received light information before 5 minutes becomes small.
  • the difference from the received light information five minutes ago is illustrated as the difference of the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor at different predetermined timings.
  • the predetermined different timing is limited to five minutes ago. It can be decided arbitrarily. For example, the difference between the received light information may be taken at a plurality of predetermined different timings, and a reference value may be set for the difference.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 may be provided in each display device 10. As a result, the light reception information can be obtained more finely on the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200, and more appropriate switching control can be performed.
  • FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 are along a line set so as to traverse or traverse one screen constituted by a plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 10) of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 is disposed.
  • one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices 10 of the image display area variable display 200 has a substantially square shape.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along lines L1 and L2 connecting intermediate points of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the one screen.
  • the image display area variable display 200 can obtain the light reception information of the external light irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr along the line connecting the intermediate points.
  • the number of the light receiving sensors 220 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are respectively disposed on the plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or 10) of the image display area variable display 200. Further, it is possible to simplify the circuit and wiring for acquiring the received light information of the external light, and the manufacturing cost can be kept low.
  • a line L1 connecting the midpoints of the two short sides of the image display area variable display 200 is shown.
  • a light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along the line. With the light receiving sensor 220 arranged along the line L1, the light receiving information of the external light in the longitudinal direction of the image display area variable display 200 can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire image display area variable display 200. As shown in FIG.
  • the image display area variable display 200 has the light receiving sensor 220 arranged along a line L ⁇ b> 2 connecting the middle points of the two long sides of the image display area variable display 200. Yes. With the light receiving sensor 220 arranged along the line L2, the light receiving information of the external light in the short direction of the image display area variable display 200 can be obtained.
  • the image display area variable display 200 has one screen formed by a plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 10) having a substantially square shape.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 is disposed at the peripheral edge along two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the light receiving sensors 220 are generally distributed over the entire image display area variable display 200, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire image display area variable display 200. it can.
  • the number of the light receiving sensors 220 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are respectively disposed on the plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or 10) of the image display area variable display 200.
  • a circuit and wiring for acquiring light reception information of external light can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.
  • peripheral edges of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200 are portions that are difficult for the viewer to notice even if the light receiving sensor 220 is arranged when an image is displayed around the central portion of the image display area variable display 200. is there. In the form shown in FIG. 13, since the light receiving sensor 220 is not easily noticed by the viewer, the influence of the light receiving sensor 220 on the displayed image can be reduced.
  • the light receiving sensors 220 are disposed on the peripheral portions of two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200, respectively.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 may be disposed only on the peripheral part of one of the two opposite sides (L3, L4), (L5, L6) of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200. Good.
  • the image display area variable display 200 has a substantially square shape on one screen constituted by a plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 10).
  • the light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along the diagonal lines L7 and L8 of one screen.
  • the number of the light receiving sensors 220 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are respectively disposed on the plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or 10) of the image display area variable display 200.
  • a circuit and wiring for acquiring light reception information of external light can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.
  • the light receiving sensors 220 are distributed over the entire image display area variable display 200. Therefore, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire image display area variable display 200.
  • the light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along each of the two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of one screen. However, the light receiving sensor 220 has two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of one screen. Of these, it may be arranged along only one of them.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 obtains a difference between light reception information obtained by a light reception sensor that is a predetermined reference among the light reception sensors 220 and light reception information obtained by other light reception sensors, and based on the difference.
  • the image display area may be set. In this case, the image display area changing unit 210 accurately reflects the luminance distribution of the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200 to reflect each display device 10 (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Can be controlled.
  • the reference light receiving sensor 220 may be set in advance. Further, how each display device 10 of the image display area variable display 200 is controlled with respect to the difference between the light reception information obtained by the reference light reception sensor 220 and the light reception information obtained by the other light reception sensors 220. This may be set in the image display area changing unit 210 in advance.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes an image display area changing unit 210 that changes an image display area A configured by a plurality of display devices 10.
  • the image display area variable display 200 may include an image display area change timer 230 in which a time for changing the image display area A is set.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 can set a predetermined image display area in a predetermined time zone based on the image display area change timer 230.
  • each display device 10 of the image display area variable display 200 is in a state where the display panel 11 is arranged facing the front surface Fr of the device (FIG. 1).
  • the image may be displayed on the entire image display area variable display 200.
  • each display device 10 of the image display area variable display 200 is set in a state where the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the device (see FIG. 2), and the image display area variable display 200 is displayed.
  • photoelectric conversion may be performed as a whole.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 of each display device 10 is in a state of being arranged toward the device front surface Fr (see FIG. 2).
  • the image display area change timer 230 may be set.
  • the image display area variable display 200 is an image that changes the image displayed in the image display area A according to the image display area A changed by the image display area changing unit 210.
  • a control unit 240 may be provided.
  • the image control unit 240 has a function of changing the size of an image displayed in the image display area in accordance with the image display area A (see FIG. 9) changed by the image display area changing unit 210. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 9, even when the size of the image display area A is changed, an image can be appropriately displayed.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes an image storage unit 250 that stores a plurality of images including partial display images displayed on a part of one screen configured by the display device 10.
  • the image control unit 240 is suitable for displaying in the image display area A from a plurality of images stored in the image storage unit 250 based on the image display area A changed by the image display area changing unit 210. An image can be selected and displayed in the image display area A. Thus, even when the image display area A is changed so that the aspect ratio changes greatly, an appropriate image can be displayed in the changed image display area A.
  • an image display system 400 including an image display area variable display 200 and an external processing device 300 may be configured.
  • the image display area variable display 200 and the external processing device 300 may include a communication device capable of communicating with each other.
  • the external processing device 300 is configured to acquire information from the image display area variable display 200 and to control the image display area variable display 200 through a communication network such as the Internet that can communicate with each other. Good.
  • the image display area A can be changed or the image can be changed by so-called digital signage (digital signage) via the external processing device 300.
  • digital signage refers to an advertising medium that displays video and information on a flat display, projector, or the like using digital technology for display and communication.
  • the external processing device 300 is configured to send an image signal to be displayed in the image display area A to the image control unit 240 according to the image display area A changed by the image display area changing unit 210, for example. be able to.
  • the image displayed on the image display area variable display 200 can be controlled by the external processing device 300.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes a light receiving sensor 220 that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the external processing device 300 may set an image signal to be displayed in the image display area A based on the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220.
  • an appropriate image display area A can be set and an image can be changed through the external processing device 300 in accordance with the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the external processing apparatus 300 includes an image change setting timer 310 in which a timing for changing an image signal displayed in the image display area A is set, and an image storage unit 320.
  • the image storage unit 320 stores various images.
  • the external processing apparatus 300 can change the image display area A at a predetermined timing set in the image change setting timer 310.
  • an image stored in the image storage unit 320 of the external processing device 300 can be used as the image displayed in the image display area A.
  • the external processing device 300 can be configured to appropriately change the image to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200.
  • the image display area variable display 200 is changed so that the image to be displayed is changed in the morning commuting time on weekdays when there are many commuting people and the noon time on a holiday with many shoppers. Can be controlled.
  • the image displayed on the image display area variable display 200 can be changed by the external processing device 300, it is easy to provide an advertisement with a narrowed audience.
  • the image display area A and the image can be changed through so-called digital signage via the external processing device 300.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes a state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus (see FIG. 1) and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus (see FIG. 1). 2), the state of each display device 10 can be switched. For this reason, in the time zone in which the advertisement is not displayed as described above, and in the time zone in which sunlight often hits the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is connected to the device front surface Fr. The power can be generated by switching to the state (see FIG. 2) arranged toward the front.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes an image information input unit 260 for inputting image information to be displayed on one screen configured by the plurality of display devices 10. Also good. For example, image information is input to the image information input unit 260 from the external processing device 300. Based on the image information input to the image information input unit 260, the image display area changing unit 210 sets an image display area A for displaying an image on one screen configured by the plurality of display devices 10. As described above, in the image display area variable display 200, the image display area A is set based on the image information input to the image information input unit 260 regardless of the light receiving sensor 220, the image display area change timer 230, or the like. Can be configured as follows.
  • the image display area changing unit 210 arranges the display panel 11 of the display device 10 facing the device front surface Fr in the image display area A among the plurality of display devices 10 of the image display area variable display 200. Also good. Furthermore, in this case, the image display area changing unit 210 may arrange the photoelectric conversion panel 12 of the display device 10 toward the device front surface Fr in an area excluding the image display area. Thus, an image can be displayed in the image display area A, and power generation by photoelectric conversion is performed in the area excluding the image display area A.
  • the image display system 400 may configure the external processing device 300 so as to set an image signal to be sent to the image information input unit 260 based on light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220.
  • the image change setting timer 310 of the external processing apparatus 300 may be set with a timing for changing the image signal sent to the image information input unit 260.
  • the image signal to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200 is sent to the image information input unit 260 of the image display area variable display 200 by the external processing device 300.
  • an image signal to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200 may be directly input to the image information input unit 260 of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the image display area variable display 200 includes, for example, a display panel 11 and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 as shown in FIG.
  • a plurality of display panels 11 are arranged so that one screen can be formed as described above.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged around a rotation axis d provided so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the device front surface Fr with respect to the plurality of display panels 11.
  • the control method of the image display area variable display 200 includes a received light information acquisition step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). .
  • the light reception information acquisition step (S1) the light reception information is acquired by the light reception sensor 220 that receives external light irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200.
  • the image display area setting step (S2) the image display area A for displaying an image on the image display area variable display 200 is set based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step (S1).
  • the switching step (S3) in the image display area A set in the image display area setting step (S2), the display panel 11 is placed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and the image display area A Except that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the image display area A can be set in an appropriate area based on the light reception information of the light receiving sensor 220 that has received the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the control method of the image display area variable display 200 includes an image information input step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). Yes.
  • image information input step (S1) image information to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200 is input.
  • image display area setting step (S2) an image display area A for displaying an image on the image display area variable display 200 is set based on the image information input in the image information input step (S1).
  • switching step (S3) in the image display area A set in the image display area setting step (S2), the display panel 11 is placed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and the image display area A Except that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • FIG. 16 shows a display device 10C according to another embodiment.
  • this display device 10C as shown in FIG. 16, one display panel 11 and two photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are arranged along the side surface of a triangular prism set around a rotation axis d.
  • This display device 10C can be employed as the display device 10 of the above-described image display area variable display 200 (see FIG. 9).
  • the display devices 10C are arranged so that the display panels 11 of the plurality of display devices 10C can form one screen.
  • the display device 10C by directing the display panel 11 toward the device front surface Fr, the display device 10C can display an image toward the device front surface Fr.
  • the rotation axis is set so that the corners of the two photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are directed toward the apparatus front surface Fr. It is good to rotate d.
  • one photoelectric conversion panel 12a faces obliquely downward with respect to the device front surface Fr, and the other photoelectric conversion panel 12b faces obliquely upward with respect to the device front surface Fr. .
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are arranged in a corrugated shape that repeats peaks and valleys as a whole.
  • sunlight is irradiated to one photoelectric conversion panel 12b.
  • the one photoelectric conversion panel 12b generates power by the irradiated sunlight.
  • the sunlight irradiated to the one photoelectric conversion panel 12b is reflected toward the other photoelectric conversion panel 12a.
  • the other photoelectric conversion panel 12a also generates power. For this reason, this display apparatus 10C can generate electric power efficiently using the irradiated sunlight.
  • FIG. 18 shows a display device 10D according to still another embodiment.
  • two different types of display panels 11a and 11b and one photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged along a side surface of a triangular prism set around a rotation axis d. Yes.
  • Examples of the two different display panels 11a and 11b include a display panel 11a for 2D display and a display panel 11b for 3D display.
  • the “display panel for 2D display” is a display panel that displays a 2D image
  • the display panel for 3D display means a display panel that displays a 3D image.
  • dedicated glasses may be required.
  • the display panel 11a for 2D display when displaying a two-dimensional image, may be arranged facing the front surface Fr of the device.
  • the 3D display display panel 11b may be arranged facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • the image display area variable display 200 can switch a panel between the case of displaying a 2D video and the case of displaying a 3D video.
  • the display panel 11a for 2D display and the display panel 11b for 3D display were illustrated as two different types of display panels arranged along the side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d, The two types of display panels are not limited to this.
  • the display device 10 according to the present invention has been described in various forms in which the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged around the rotation axis d. However, the display device according to the present invention is limited to such a form. Not. Below, the display device which concerns on another form is demonstrated.
  • Display device 100 >> 19 to 21 show a display device 100 according to another embodiment. 22 is a sectional view taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.
  • the display panel 111 is arranged toward the front surface of the device (in this case, the normal direction of the paper).
  • the switching mechanism 113 shifts from the front side of the display panel 111 when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21). The state is switched (for example, see FIG. 19).
  • the display device 100 includes a plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d.
  • a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined area C (area C in which the display panel 111 is arranged) are set.
  • the plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d have shapes respectively corresponding to the plurality of sections C1 to C4.
  • four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined area C (area C where the display panel 111 is arranged) vertically and horizontally at half positions.
  • the switching mechanism 113 moves the plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d.
  • the switching mechanism 113 has a plurality of states in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111. It is a mechanism for switching in each of the sections C1 to C4.
  • the display device 100 is set with a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined area C (area C where the display panel 111 is arranged).
  • the plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d have shapes respectively corresponding to the plurality of sections C1 to C4.
  • the display device 100 is not limited to such a form.
  • four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined rectangular area C vertically and horizontally at half positions.
  • the method of setting the sections C1 to C4 is not limited to such a form.
  • the display device 100 includes an image display area changing unit 114 that changes the image display area by controlling the switching mechanism 113.
  • the image display area is an area where an image can be displayed on the display panel 111.
  • the image display area is partitioned by the sections where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 among the plurality of sections C1 to C4.
  • the image display area changing unit 114 controls the switching mechanism 113 to change the image display area constituted by sections in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111.
  • the display panel 111 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the device in a predetermined region C.
  • a large rectangular display panel is used as the display panel 111.
  • the display panel 111 is fitted in a recess 40 a provided in the wall 40.
  • the display panel 111 is set with four sections C1 to C4 that are divided vertically and horizontally at half positions.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are configured with a shape and a size approximately corresponding to each of the sections C1 to C4.
  • another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is disposed around the predetermined region C of the display device 100.
  • gaps 44 and 46 for moving the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are provided between the other photoelectric conversion panel 42 and the wall 40.
  • each of the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d moves to the gaps 44 and 46 when displaced from the front side of the display panel 111.
  • the switching mechanism 113 of the display device 100 is in a state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 with respect to the predetermined region C (see FIG. 21).
  • the conversion panels 112a to 112d are switched to a state where the conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 19).
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are stacked on the front side of the display panel 111, or the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are shifted from the front side of the display panel 111.
  • the range in which the display panel 111 displays an image can be changed.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 in all the sections C1 to C4 set in the area C where the display panel 111 is arranged.
  • the display device 100 can display an image in all the sections C1 to C4 of the area C.
  • the image display area is set in the area C.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112 a, 112 b, and 112 d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 in the sections C ⁇ b> 1, C ⁇ b> 2, and C ⁇ b> 4 in the region C where the display panel 111 is disposed.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112c is displaced from the front side of the display panel 111.
  • the display device 100 can display an image in the section C3.
  • the image display area is set in the section C3.
  • power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a, 112b, and 112d stacked on the front side of the display panel 111.
  • the image display area changing unit 114 causes the photoelectric conversion panel 112c to be shifted from the front side of the display panel 111 in the section C3 in the image display area, as shown in FIG. Further, the image display area changing unit 114 makes the photoelectric conversion panels 112a, 112b, and 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area. As a result, power can be generated in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area.
  • Mode shown in FIG. 21 the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 in all the sections C1 to C4 in the region C where the display panel 111 is arranged.
  • power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d in the sections C1 to C4.
  • the display device 100 can change the area (image display area) in which an image is displayed on the display panel 111.
  • FIG. 23 shows a display device 101 according to another embodiment.
  • the display panel 111 of the display device 101 includes a liquid crystal panel 120, a backlight 140, and a backlight control unit 160.
  • the backlight 140 is configured to irradiate the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120 and to partially turn off the light applied to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120.
  • the backlight control unit 160 is a control device that controls the backlight 140.
  • the backlight control unit 160 has a portion where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the liquid crystal panel 120 when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d partially overlap the front side of the liquid crystal panel 120.
  • the backlight 140 is partially turned off.
  • the backlight 140 may include a plurality of LEDs as a light source, and may be configured to be able to partially turn off the light applied to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120.
  • the backlight control unit 160 includes all the sections C1. In ⁇ C4, the backlight 140 is turned on.
  • the display panel 111 displays an image in the section C3. .
  • the backlight control unit 160 may turn off the backlight 140 in the sections C1, C2, and C4 and turn on only the section C3.
  • the backlight 140 may be partially extinguished at the portion where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the liquid crystal panel 120.
  • the display panel 111 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the device in the predetermined region C. Then, the state is switched between the state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 21) and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 19).
  • FIGS. 24 to 27 each show the display device 100A.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the device.
  • the switching mechanism 113A has a state in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see FIG. 26) and a state in which the display panel 111a to 111d deviates from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 ( (See FIG. 24).
  • the display device 100A includes a plurality of display panels 111a to 111d.
  • the display device 100A is set with a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined area C (area C in which the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged).
  • four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined area C (area C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is disposed) vertically and horizontally at half positions.
  • the display panels 111a to 111d have shapes corresponding to the sections C1 to C4, respectively.
  • the switching mechanism 113A moves the plurality of display panels 111a to 111d.
  • the switching mechanism 113A includes a plurality of states in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 and a state in which the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. It is a mechanism for switching in each of the sections C1 to C4.
  • the display device 100A includes an image display area changing unit 114A that changes the image display area by controlling the switching mechanism 113A.
  • the image display area is an area in which an image can be displayed by the display panels 111a to 111d.
  • the image display area is partitioned by a partition in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 among the plurality of partitions C1 to C4.
  • the image display area changing unit 114A changes the image display area by controlling the switching mechanism 113A.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr in a predetermined region C.
  • a large rectangular photoelectric conversion panel 112 is used.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is fitted in a recess 40 a provided in the wall 40.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is set with four sections C1 to C4 that are divided vertically and horizontally at half positions.
  • the display panels 111a to 111d are configured with a shape and size generally corresponding to the sections C1 to C4.
  • another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is disposed around the predetermined region C of the display device 100A.
  • gaps 44A and 46A for moving the display panels 111a to 111d are provided between the other photoelectric conversion panel 42 and the wall 40 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the display panels 111a to 111d move to the gaps 44A and 46A when the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 are not blocked by the display panels 111a to 111d shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, and the power generation by the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 can be maintained. Thereby, in this display apparatus 100A, it is possible to stably generate power in a region around a predetermined region C (see FIG. 24).
  • the switching mechanism 113A of the display device 100A is in a state in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in each predetermined section of the region C (FIGS. 25 and 25). 26) and a state where the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).
  • the display panels 111a to 111d may be stacked on the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, or the display panels 111a to 111d may be shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. it can.
  • the range in which images are displayed by the display panels 111a to 111d and the range in which power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can be changed.
  • Mode shown in FIG. 24 >>
  • the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in all the sections C1 to C4 set in the region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged.
  • the display device 100A can generate power in all the sections C1 to C4 of the region C by the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the display panel 111c overlaps the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the section C3 in the region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged.
  • the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the display device 100A can display an image in the section C3.
  • the image display area is set in the section C3.
  • the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d are shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, and the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can generate power.
  • the image display area changing unit 114A makes the display panel 111c overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the section C3 in the image display area as shown in FIG. Further, the image display area changing unit 114 shifts the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area. As a result, power can be generated in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area.
  • Mode shown in FIG. 26 the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in all the sections C1 to C4 in the region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged.
  • the area C in which the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged can display images by the display panels 111a to 111d.
  • the display device 100A can change the area (image display area) in which an image is displayed by the display panels 111a to 111d.
  • each of the display panels 111a to 111d includes a liquid crystal panel 120A, a backlight 140A that irradiates the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120A, and a backlight control unit that controls the backlight 140A. 160A.
  • the backlight control unit 160A turns off the backlight 140A when the display panels 111a to 111d move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42.
  • the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, and are arranged around the area C, respectively.
  • the other photoelectric conversion panel 42 has moved to the back side.
  • the backlight 140A is turned off for the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d that are shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 and moved to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 arranged around the region C, respectively. Good.
  • the display device 100A can save power by reducing power consumption.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the display panel 111 in the predetermined region C, and the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d The state shifted from the front side of the display panel 111 is switched.
  • the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the predetermined region C, and the display panels 111a to 111a The state where 111d is shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is switched.
  • a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined region C are set.
  • the plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing the predetermined area C are respectively configured to display an image on the display panel 111 or the display panels 111a to 111d, and to generate power on the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112. It can switch to the mode to do.
  • an area in which an image is displayed by the display panel 111 or the display panels 111a to 111d in the predetermined region C is referred to as an “image display area”.
  • an area where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is referred to as “power generation area”.
  • the section C3 is an “image display area” in which an image is displayed by the display panel 111 or the display panels 111a to 111d, and the sections C1, C2, and C4 are displayed. Is a “power generation area” where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a, 112b, 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A may include a light receiving sensor 180 that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device.
  • the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor 180 is sent to the image display area changing units 114 and 114A.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114 ⁇ / b> A may change the image display area based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 180.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided at a plurality of positions with respect to the predetermined region C. Since it is provided at a plurality of positions with respect to the predetermined area C, it is possible to appropriately detect the external light irradiated on the front surface of the apparatus in the predetermined area C.
  • the light receiving sensors 180 are provided at a plurality of positions around a predetermined region C where the display panel 111 is disposed.
  • another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is arranged around the predetermined region C.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111, they move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is provided in another photoelectric conversion panel 42 arranged around the predetermined region C.
  • the light receiving sensors 180 are provided at a plurality of positions around a predetermined region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is disposed.
  • another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is arranged around the predetermined region C.
  • the display panels 111 a to 111 d move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 when they are shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is provided in another photoelectric conversion panel 42 arranged around the predetermined region C.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A are arranged in the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d in the sections C1 to C4 corresponding to the positions where the received light information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained.
  • a power generation area where power generation is performed by the photoelectric conversion panel 112 may be set.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114 ⁇ / b> A are configured to change the predetermined area C when the number of the light receiving sensors 180 from which the light receiving information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained is larger than the predetermined number. All the sections C1 to C4 may be used as power generation areas. In this case, power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the power generation area. *
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A may set all the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined area C as power generation areas as shown in FIG. 21 or FIG. Thereby, the display devices 100 and 100A can generate power in all the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined region C.
  • FIG. 28 shows another embodiment of the display devices 100 and 100A (see FIGS. 19 and 24).
  • the light receiving sensor 180 (c) is arranged at least in the central portion of the predetermined region C.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A preliminarily detect when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 180 (c) disposed in the central portion of the predetermined region C exceeds a predetermined reference value. All the sections C1 to C4 of the defined region C are set as power generation areas where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the central part of the display devices 100 and 100A is easy to enter the viewer's field of view when the display devices 100 and 100A display an image in the entire predetermined area C. Even if an image display area is set in the display devices 100 and 100A when strong light hits the central part of the display devices 100 and 100A and it becomes difficult to see the image, the viewer may be stressed. .
  • the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 180 (c) arranged in the central portion of the predetermined region C exceeds a predetermined reference value, it is predetermined. All the sections C1 to C4 of the region C can be set as a power generation area where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • power generation is performed by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 without forcibly displaying an image for all the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A have the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) continuously exceeding the reference value at a predetermined time.
  • a predetermined process may be performed when the received light information exceeds the reference value.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A when the display devices 100 and 100A are installed outdoors, the display devices 100 and 100A may be shaded by the influence of clouds or the like even on a clear day. For this reason, the luminance of the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A may change greatly. In such a case, the external light irradiated on the display devices 100 and 100A is temporarily blocked. When the external light applied to the display devices 100 and 100A is temporarily blocked, the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) temporarily changes greatly. At this time, if the image display area is changed every time based on the light reception information that has changed greatly temporarily, the display devices 100 and 100A cannot stably display an image.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A determine that the light reception information is the reference when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) continuously exceeds the reference value for a predetermined time. It is configured to perform a predetermined process when the value is exceeded. This can prevent the image display area from being changed unnecessarily.
  • the reference value may be set with respect to the difference between the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) at different predetermined timings.
  • the image display area is changed to reflect the amount of change over time of the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensors 180 and 180 (c). According to the display devices 100 and 100A, it is possible to prevent the image display area from being unnecessarily changed even when the brightness of the external light changes temporarily.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided in each of a plurality of sections C1 to C4.
  • the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus can be detected by the light receiving sensor 180, and an image display area can be appropriately set in the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along a line set so as to cross or longitudinally cross a predetermined region C.
  • the predetermined area C of the display device 100, 100 ⁇ / b> A has a substantially square shape
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is an intermediate point between two opposite sides of the predetermined area C. May be arranged along the lines L1 and L2 connecting the two.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged at the peripheral edge portions along two opposite sides of the four sides of the predetermined region C having a substantially square shape.
  • the light receiving sensors 180 are arranged on the peripheral portions of two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the predetermined region C of the display devices 100, 100A. Has been.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged only at the peripheral part of one of the two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the predetermined region C. Good.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along diagonal lines (L7, L8) of a predetermined region C having a substantially square shape.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed along each of the two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of the predetermined area C.
  • the two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of the predetermined area C are provided.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along only one of them.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d move to the respective sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined region C.
  • the display panels 111a to 111d move to the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined area C. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, when the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed in the predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d and the display panels 111a to 111a Even if 111d moves, it is good to comprise so that required light reception information may be obtained by the light reception sensor 180.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided at predetermined positions on both the display panel 111 and the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d.
  • the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided at predetermined positions on both the display panels 111a to 111d and the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d and the display panels 111a to 111d move, required light reception information can be obtained at predetermined positions of the display devices 100 and 100A by the light reception sensor 180.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A are predetermined among the plurality of light receiving sensors 180.
  • a light receiving sensor as a reference may be determined.
  • a difference between the light reception information obtained by the reference light reception sensor and the light reception information obtained by other light reception sensors may be obtained, and the image display area may be set based on the difference.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A can accurately set the image display area by accurately reflecting the luminance distribution of the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • FIG. 33 shows another form of the display device 100 shown in FIG. 19 and the display device 100A shown in FIG.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A may include an image display area change timer 185 in which a time for changing the image display area is set.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A may be configured to set a predetermined image display area in a predetermined time zone based on the image display area change timer 185.
  • the image display area is set in the entire predetermined area C of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • an image display area is set in the section C3 of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the power generation area is set in the entire predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the image display area and the power generation area are set to an appropriate size and an appropriate position in a time zone when the display devices 100 and 100A are well exposed to sunlight, or in places where the display devices 100 and 100A are installed. It is good to constitute as described.
  • Image control unit 190 includes an image control unit 190 that changes an image displayed in the image display area in accordance with the image display area changed by the image display area changing unit 114 and 114A. You may have.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A display one image in the entire predetermined region C, and as shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. , 100A needs to change the size of the image when displaying one image in a part of the section C3 in the predetermined region C.
  • the image control unit 190 may have a function of changing the size of an image to be displayed according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A. Thereby, even when the size of the image display area is changed, the image can be appropriately displayed. Further, the image control unit 190 may change the size of the image displayed in the image display area according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A may include an image storage unit 192 that stores a plurality of images including partial display images displayed on a part of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the image control unit 190 is suitable for displaying in the image display area from a plurality of images stored in the image storage unit 192 based on the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A. Images can be displayed in the image display area.
  • Image display system 450, external processing apparatus 350 includes an image display system 450 including an external processing device 350 that can communicate with the display devices 100 and 100A may be configured.
  • the external processing device 350 sends an image signal to be displayed in the image display area to the image control unit 190 according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A may include a light receiving sensor 180 that receives external light applied to the front surface Fr of the device (see, for example, FIGS. 28 to 32).
  • the external processing device 350 can be configured to set an image signal to be displayed in the image display area based on light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 180 of the display devices 100 and 100A. Thereby, it is possible to change the image display area and the image in so-called digital signage via the external processing device 350.
  • the external processing device 350 may be configured to acquire information from the display devices 100 and 100A and to control the display devices 100 and 100A through a communication network such as the Internet that can communicate with each other.
  • the external processing device 350 includes an image change setting timer 360 in which a timing for changing an image signal displayed in the image display area is set, and an image storage unit 370.
  • the image storage unit 370 stores various images.
  • the external processing device 350 can change the image display area A at a predetermined timing set in the image change setting timer 360.
  • an image stored in the image storage unit 370 of the external processing device 350 can be used as the image displayed on the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A may include an image information input unit 186 that inputs image information to be displayed in a predetermined region C.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A can set an image display area for displaying an image in a predetermined area based on the image information input to the image information input unit 186.
  • image information is input to the image information input unit 186 from, for example, the external processing device 350.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A display an image in a predetermined area C composed of a plurality of sections C1 to C4 based on the image information input to the image information input unit 186.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A have the image information input to the image information input unit 186 regardless of the light receiving sensor 180 (see FIGS. 28 to 32), the image display area change timer 185 (see FIG. 33), or the like.
  • the image display area can be configured based on the above.
  • the image information input unit 186 of the display devices 100 and 100A may be configured to receive an image signal to be displayed on the display devices 100 and 100A by the external processing device 350.
  • the external processing device 350 has an image information input unit based on the received light information obtained from the light receiving sensor 180 (see FIGS. 28 to 32) that receives the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • An image signal to be sent to 186 may be set.
  • the external processing device 350 can display an appropriate image on the display devices 100 and 100A according to the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the timing for changing the image signal to be sent to the image information input unit 186 may be set by the image change setting timer 360 of the external processing device 350.
  • FIG. 34 In the above-described embodiment, four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined rectangular area C vertically and horizontally at half positions. The method of setting the sections C1 to C4 is not limited to such a form. Further, no section may be set in the predetermined region C.
  • a configuration may be adopted in which it moves to an arbitrary position in a state of being overlapped with the photoelectric conversion panel 112 and a state of being shifted from the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see FIG. 24).
  • an image can be displayed by the display panel 111 in a portion Ca (image display area) where the display panel 111 overlaps the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can generate power.
  • an image display area can be set at an arbitrary position in a predetermined region C.
  • the display devices 100 and 100A include display panels 111 and 111a to 111d that display images; photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d that convert received light into electric power; Mechanisms 113 and 113A (see FIGS. 19 to 21 and FIGS. 24 to 26).
  • any one of the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d may be disposed toward the device front surface Fr in a predetermined region of the device front surface Fr.
  • the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A are in a state where the other of the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d overlaps the front side of one panel in a predetermined region C. And a state shifted from the front side of one panel.
  • the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A switch between a state in which an image can be displayed by the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d and a state in which power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d in the predetermined region C. Accordingly, the display devices 100 and 100A can change the image display area A in the predetermined region C.
  • a power generation area can be set in a predetermined area C excluding the image display area A.
  • the display panels 111, 111a to 111d can be made to function as an information display by facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
  • power can be generated by switching to the state where the photoelectric conversion panels 112, 112a to 112d are arranged toward the front surface Fr of the device. it can.
  • the generated power can be stored, for example, in a storage battery and used as power when the information display functions.
  • image display area changing units 114 and 114A as switching control units for controlling the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A may be provided.
  • the switching control units 114 and 114A for example, are provided with a light receiving sensor 180 (see FIGS. 19 and 24) that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and in the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. Based on this, the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A can be controlled. Thereby, it is possible to perform control in consideration of the intensity of external light (for example, sunlight) irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr.
  • external light for example, sunlight
  • a timer in which a timing for switching between a state in which the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d are arranged toward the front surface Fr and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d are arranged toward the front surface of the apparatus is set ( An image display area change timer 185) may be provided.
  • the image display area changing units 114 and 114A as switching control units may be configured to control the switching mechanism based on a timer (image display area changing timer 185).
  • the display devices 100 and 100A can be set in an appropriate time zone by setting in advance a time zone in which sunlight is irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device and it is difficult to see or a time zone in which there is a lot of traffic and is used as an information display. Can be used in an appropriate manner.
  • the display panel 111 in a predetermined region C, is arranged toward the device front surface Fr.
  • the switching mechanism 113 shifts from the front side of the display panel 111 when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21). The state is switched (for example, see FIG. 19).
  • the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in a predetermined region C, is disposed toward the device front surface Fr.
  • the switching mechanism 113A is in a state where the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see, for example, FIGS. 25 and 26) and from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
  • the state of deviation (for example, see FIGS. 24 and 25) is switched.
  • control method of the display devices 100 and 100A includes a received light information acquisition step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). ing.
  • the light reception information acquisition step (S1) the light reception information is acquired by the light reception sensor 180 (see FIGS. 28 to 32) that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the display device 100 or 100A.
  • the image display area setting step (S2) sets an image display area (power generation area) for displaying an image on the display devices 100 and 100A based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step (S1). .
  • the switching step (S3) the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A are operated, and the display panel 111, in the sections within the image display area set in the image display area setting step (S2) among the plurality of sections C1 to C4. 111a to 111d are in a state where images can be displayed, and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d are in a state where power can be generated in sections other than the image display area.
  • an appropriate image display area (power generation area) can be set in the display devices 100 and 100A based on the light reception information of the light receiving sensor 180 that has received the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device.
  • the control method of the display devices 100 and 100A includes an image information input step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). .
  • image information input step (S1) image information to be displayed on the display devices 100 and 100A is input.
  • image display area setting step (S2) based on the image information input in the image information input step (S1), an image display area for displaying an image on the display devices 100 and 100A is set along a plurality of sections C1 to C4. Set.
  • the switching step (S3) the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A are operated, and the display panel 111, in the sections within the image display area set in the image display area setting step (S2) among the plurality of sections C1 to C4. 111a to 111d are in a state where images can be displayed, and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d are in a state where power can be generated in sections other than the image display area.
  • an appropriate image display area (power generation area) can be set in the display devices 100 and 100A based on the image information input to the display devices 100 and 100A.
  • the specific configuration of the display device is not limited to the above.
  • various known techniques can be employed for the display panel, the photoelectric conversion panel, the condenser lens, the liquid crystal display device, and the like. These specific configurations are not limited to the above.
  • each control mentioned above can be comprised so that it may be performed based on the preset program and control circuit.
  • Each control can be realized by a computer including a calculation unit such as a CPU and a storage unit such as a nonvolatile memory.

Abstract

The disclosed display device is provided with: a display panel (11) that displays an image; a photoelectric conversion panel (12) that converts received light to electrical power; and a switching mechanism (13) that, in a predetermined region of the device front surface (Fr), switches between a state wherein the display panel (11) is disposed facing the device front surface (Fr) and a state wherein the photoelectric conversion panel (12) is disposed facing the device front surface (Fr). In this case, by means of the switching mechanism (13), in a predetermined region of the device front surface (Fr), it is possible to switch between the state wherein the display panel (11) is disposed facing the device front surface (Fr) and the state wherein the photoelectric conversion panel (12) is disposed facing the device front surface (Fr).

Description

表示装置Display device
 本発明は表示装置に関する。なお、本明細書は本願の優先権の基礎である日本国特許出願2010-056283号の明細書および/または図面に記載される内容を包含する。 The present invention relates to a display device. This specification includes the contents described in the specification and / or drawings of Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-056283, which is the basis of the priority of the present application.
 近年、主として屋外等に設置される看板や広告、標識等の情報伝達媒体として液晶表示装置等を用いたものが検討されている。テレビやインフォメーションディスプレイ、ビルボードディスプレイ等に比較的大型の液晶表示装置が実用化されている点については、例えば、特開2009-294402号公報(特許文献1)に開示されている。 In recent years, the use of liquid crystal display devices or the like as information transmission media such as signs, advertisements, signs, etc. installed mainly outdoors has been studied. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-294402 (Patent Document 1) discloses that a relatively large liquid crystal display device is put into practical use for a television, an information display, a billboard display, and the like.
特開2009-294402号公報JP 2009-294402 A
 ところで、屋外に設置された表示装置は、例えば、太陽光の照り返しのために時間帯によっては見難くなる。太陽光で画面が見難くなる時間帯には、情報を表示するインフォメーションディスプレイとして表示装置を機能させても無駄な場合がある。また、街頭に設置される場合、時間帯によっては、情報を表示する必要がない場合がある。例えば、時間帯によって人通りに差が大きい場所に設置される場合、人通りが多い時間帯では、表示装置をインフォメーションディスプレイとして機能させるとよいが、人通りがほとんどない時間帯では、表示装置をインフォメーションディスプレイとして機能させる必要がない場合がある。また、大型化のインフォメーションディスプレイでは、消費電力が大きくなる。このため、インフォメーションディスプレイの省電力化を図ることが求められている。本発明は、例えば、上記のような状況において、表示領域をより有効に活用できる表示装置を提案する。 By the way, a display device installed outdoors becomes difficult to see depending on the time zone due to, for example, reflection of sunlight. In a time zone when the screen is difficult to see due to sunlight, it may be useless even if the display device functions as an information display for displaying information. In addition, when installed on the street, it may not be necessary to display information depending on the time of day. For example, when installed in a place where there is a large difference in traffic due to the time zone, the display device may function as an information display in a time zone where there is a lot of traffic. It may not be necessary to function as an information display. In addition, a large information display increases power consumption. For this reason, it is demanded to save power of the information display. The present invention proposes, for example, a display device that can use the display area more effectively in the above situation.
 ここで、新規に提案される表示装置は、画像を表示させる表示パネル;受光した光を電力に変換する光電変換パネル;及び、装置前面の予め定められた領域において、表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替える切替機構;を備えている。 Here, the newly proposed display device includes a display panel for displaying an image; a photoelectric conversion panel for converting received light into electric power; and a display panel facing the front of the device in a predetermined region on the front of the device A switching mechanism that switches between a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus.
 かかる表示装置によれば、表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを適宜に切り替えることができる。これにより、例えば、人通りの多い時間帯などでは、表示パネルを装置前面に向けることによって、インフォメーションディスプレイとして機能させることができる。また、装置前面に太陽光が照射されるために画面が見難くなる時間帯では、光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態に切り替えることによって発電することができる。発電された電力は、例えば、蓄電池に蓄えることによって、インフォメーションディスプレイを機能させるための電力として利用することが可能である。 According to such a display device, it is possible to appropriately switch between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the device and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the device. Accordingly, for example, in a busy time zone, the display panel can be made to function as an information display by facing the front of the apparatus. Further, in a time zone in which the screen is difficult to see because sunlight is irradiated on the front surface of the apparatus, power can be generated by switching to a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is arranged toward the front surface of the apparatus. The generated power can be used as power for causing the information display to function, for example, by storing it in a storage battery.
 この場合、表示パネルと光電変換パネルとは、装置前面に向けて延びた直線に対して直交するように設けられた回転軸の周りに配置されていてもよい。また、切替機構は、回転軸を回転させることによって、表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替えてもよい。 In this case, the display panel and the photoelectric conversion panel may be arranged around a rotation axis provided so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the front of the apparatus. The switching mechanism may switch between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus by rotating the rotation shaft.
 また、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイには、表示パネルが1つの画面を構成し得るように複数の表示装置が並べられている。そして、表示装置の切替機構をそれぞれ制御することによって、表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とが切り替えられる。これによって、複数の表示装置によって構成される画像表示エリアが変更される。 In the image display area variable display, a plurality of display devices are arranged so that the display panel can constitute one screen. Then, by controlling the switching mechanism of the display device, the state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the device and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the device are switched. As a result, an image display area constituted by a plurality of display devices is changed.
 また、他の形態では、表示装置は、予め定められた領域において、表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置されている。この場合、切替機構は、予め定められた領域において、光電変換パネルが表示パネルの前面側に重なった状態と、表示パネルの前面側からずれた状態とを切り替えてもよい。 In another embodiment, the display device is arranged with the display panel facing the front of the device in a predetermined area. In this case, the switching mechanism may switch between a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel overlaps the front side of the display panel and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is shifted from the front side of the display panel in a predetermined region.
 さらに、他の構成では、表示装置は、予め定められた領域において、光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置されている。この場合、切替機構は、予め定められた領域において、表示パネルが光電変換パネルの前面側に重なった状態と、光電変換パネルの前面側からずれた状態とを切り替えてもよい。 Furthermore, in another configuration, in the display device, the photoelectric conversion panel is arranged facing the front of the device in a predetermined region. In this case, the switching mechanism may switch between a state where the display panel overlaps the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel and a state shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel in a predetermined region.
図1は、表示装置の一例を示す図である。FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display device. 図2は、表示装置の一例を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display device. 図3は、表示装置の略三角柱の枠体の一例を示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a substantially triangular prism frame of the display device. 図4は、表示装置の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display device. 図5は、表示装置の制御フローの一例を示すフロー図である。FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a control flow of the display device. 図6は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram showing another display device. 図7は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another display device. 図8は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing another display device. 図9は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの一例を示す図である。FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display. 図10は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの一例を示す図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display. 図11は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの受光センサの配置例を示す図である。FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display. 図12は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの受光センサの配置例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display. 図13は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの受光センサの配置例を示す図である。FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display. 図14は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの受光センサの配置例を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the light receiving sensors of the image display area variable display. 図15は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの一例を示す図である。FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image display area variable display. 図16は、他の画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイを示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram showing another image display area variable display. 図17は、他の画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイを示す図である。FIG. 17 shows another image display area variable display. 図18は、他の画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイを示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing another image display area variable display. 図19は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing another display device. 図20は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating another display device. 図21は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another display device. 図22は、他の表示装置を示す断面図である。FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view showing another display device. 図23は、他の表示装置を示す断面図である。FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view showing another display device. 図24は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another display device. 図25は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating another display device. 図26は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another display device. 図27は、他の表示装置を示す断面図である。FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing another display device. 図28は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another display device. 図29は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing another display device. 図30は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 30 is a diagram showing another display device. 図31は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 31 is a diagram showing another display device. 図32は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another display device. 図33は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 33 is a diagram showing another display device. 図34は、他の表示装置を示す図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram showing another display device. 図35は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御フローの一例を示すフロー図である。FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a control flow of the image display area variable display. 図36は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御フローの一例を示すフロー図である。FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a control flow of the image display area variable display.
 以下、本発明の一実施形態に係る表示装置を図面に基づいて説明する。なお、同じ作用を奏する部材又は部位には適宜に同じ符号を付している。また、表示装置の前面の方向は、「Fr」で適宜表示している。 Hereinafter, a display device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected suitably to the member or site | part which has the same effect | action. The direction of the front surface of the display device is appropriately displayed as “Fr”.
 表示装置10は、図1に示すように、表示パネル11と、光電変換パネル12と、切替機構13とを備えている。 The display device 10 includes a display panel 11, a photoelectric conversion panel 12, and a switching mechanism 13, as shown in FIG.
≪表示パネル11≫
 表示パネル11は、画像を表示させるパネルである。かかる表示パネル11としては、例えば、液晶表示装置や有機ELディスプレイなどの種々のフラットパネルディスプレイを用いることができる。かかる表示パネル11は、画像を表示させるパネルであればよく、液晶表示装置や有機ELディスプレイなど、電気的な作用によって表示される画像が変更可能な種々のフラットパネルディスプレイに限らず、所定の表示が描かれたパネル(例えば、ポスター)でもよい。なお、この形態では、表示パネル11には、電気的な作用によって表示される画像が変更可能な種々のフラットパネルディスプレイが用いられている。
≪Display panel 11≫
The display panel 11 is a panel that displays an image. As this display panel 11, various flat panel displays, such as a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display, can be used, for example. The display panel 11 may be a panel that displays an image, and is not limited to various flat panel displays such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display that can change an image displayed by an electrical action, but a predetermined display. May be a panel (for example, a poster) on which is drawn. In this embodiment, the display panel 11 uses various flat panel displays capable of changing an image displayed by an electrical action.
≪光電変換パネル12≫
 光電変換パネル12は、受光した光を電力に変換するパネルである。かかる光電変換パネル12としては、光電変換素子が実装されたパネルで構成することができ、例えば、太陽光発電用のパネルを採用することができる。
Photoelectric conversion panel 12≫
The photoelectric conversion panel 12 is a panel that converts received light into electric power. As this photoelectric conversion panel 12, it can comprise with the panel in which the photoelectric conversion element was mounted, for example, the panel for photovoltaic power generation is employable.
 かかる光電変換パネル12に用いられる光電変換素子は、アモルファスシリコン層と微結晶シリコン層とが積層されてなるタンデム型の薄膜太陽電池によって形成されている。ここで、アモルファスシリコン層は、a-Si:Hp層、a-Si:Hi層及びa-Si:Hn層からなる。微結晶シリコン層は、μc-Si:Hp層、μc-Si:Hi層及びμc-Si:Hn層からなる。光電変換素子の構造は、これに限定されるものではない。かかる光電変換素子は、例えば、プラズマCVD装置内でガス状のシリコンをプラズマ放電によって分解し、透明基板に薄いシリコン膜を積層することによって作製することができる。かかる光電変換素子は、液晶パネルを作製する際に必要なシリコン薄膜技術を利用できる。このため、光電変換パネル12と表示パネル11とは、生産設備の共有化を図ることができ、効率よく生産することができる。 The photoelectric conversion element used for the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is formed of a tandem thin film solar cell in which an amorphous silicon layer and a microcrystalline silicon layer are stacked. Here, the amorphous silicon layer includes an a-Si: Hp layer, an a-Si: Hi layer, and an a-Si: Hn layer. The microcrystalline silicon layer includes a μc-Si: Hp layer, a μc-Si: Hi layer, and a μc-Si: Hn layer. The structure of the photoelectric conversion element is not limited to this. Such a photoelectric conversion element can be produced, for example, by decomposing gaseous silicon by plasma discharge in a plasma CVD apparatus and laminating a thin silicon film on a transparent substrate. Such a photoelectric conversion element can utilize a silicon thin film technology necessary for manufacturing a liquid crystal panel. For this reason, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 and the display panel 11 can achieve sharing of production facilities and can be efficiently produced.
 また、光電変換素子の構造は、上記に限らず、単一接合型セル、モノリシック多接合型セル、波長感度領域の異なる種々の太陽電池セルを接続したメカニカルスタック型など種々の形態の構造を適用することができる。また、光電変換素子は、薄膜型に限らず、結晶型の素子を採用してもよい。また、光電変換素子は、感度波長領域での光反射率を低減するために、光電変換素子の表面に適当な反射防止膜を設けてもよい。さらに、光電変換素子の感度波長領域以外の波長領域での光を反射するUV反射膜、赤外線反射膜などを設けてもよい。 In addition, the structure of the photoelectric conversion element is not limited to the above, and various forms of structures such as a single-junction cell, a monolithic multi-junction cell, and a mechanical stack type in which various solar cells having different wavelength sensitivity regions are connected are applied. can do. Further, the photoelectric conversion element is not limited to a thin film type, and may be a crystal type element. Further, the photoelectric conversion element may be provided with an appropriate antireflection film on the surface of the photoelectric conversion element in order to reduce the light reflectance in the sensitivity wavelength region. Furthermore, a UV reflection film, an infrared reflection film, or the like that reflects light in a wavelength region other than the sensitivity wavelength region of the photoelectric conversion element may be provided.
 この表示装置10は、装置前面Frに向けて延びた直線Lに対して直交するように回転軸dが設けられている。そして、当該回転軸dの周りに、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが配置されている。 This display device 10 is provided with a rotation axis d so as to be orthogonal to a straight line L extending toward the front surface Fr of the device. A display panel 11 and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged around the rotation axis d.
 この形態では、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とは、回転軸dの周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている。具体的には、表示装置10は、例えば、図3及び図4に示すように、略三角柱の枠体20を備えている。枠体20は、図3に示すように、両側に配置した略三角形の支持プレート21、22の角部の間に梁材23~25が架け渡されている。両側に配置した略三角形の支持プレート21、22には、外側に向けて回転軸dが設けられている。表示装置10は、当該枠体20の周側面に表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが配置されている。この表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12は、図4に示すように、かかる梁材23~25(図1及び図3参照)に取り付けられている。 In this embodiment, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged along the side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d. Specifically, the display device 10 includes a substantially triangular prism frame 20 as illustrated in FIGS. 3 and 4, for example. As shown in FIG. 3, beam members 23 to 25 are bridged between corners of substantially triangular support plates 21 and 22 arranged on both sides of the frame body 20. The substantially triangular support plates 21 and 22 arranged on both sides are provided with a rotation axis d toward the outside. In the display device 10, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged on the peripheral side surface of the frame body 20. As shown in FIG. 4, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are attached to the beam members 23 to 25 (see FIGS. 1 and 3).
 かかる表示装置10では、図1に示すように、装置前面Frの予め定められた領域において、例えば、画像を表示させたい場合には、表示装置10を、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置するとよい。また、図2に示すように、光電変換によって発電したい場合には、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置するとよい。なお、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置する場合、光電変換パネル12は、太陽の高さに応じて、装置前面Frに対して適当な角度に傾けてもよい。 In the display device 10, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, when an image is to be displayed in a predetermined area of the device front surface Fr, the display device 10 is displayed with the display panel 11 facing the device front surface Fr. It is good to arrange. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, when it is desired to generate electric power by photoelectric conversion, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be arranged facing the apparatus front surface Fr. When the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be inclined at an appropriate angle with respect to the device front surface Fr according to the height of the sun.
≪切替機構13≫
 切替機構13は、装置前面Frの予め定められた領域において、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替える機構である。この形態では、切替機構13は、図1及び図2に示すように、回転軸dを回転させることによって、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替えることができる。
≪Switching mechanism 13≫
The switching mechanism 13 switches between a state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr in a predetermined region of the device front surface Fr. Mechanism. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the switching mechanism 13 rotates the rotation axis d so that the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr, and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is the device. The state of being arranged toward the front surface Fr can be switched.
 このように、表示装置10は、画像を表示させる表示パネル11; 受光した光を電力に変換する光電変換パネル12;及び、 装置前面Frの予め定められた領域において、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替える切替機構13;を備えている。 As described above, the display device 10 includes the display panel 11 for displaying an image; the photoelectric conversion panel 12 for converting received light into electric power; and the display panel 11 in the predetermined region of the device front surface Fr. And a switching mechanism 13 for switching between a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the apparatus front surface Fr.
 この表示装置10によれば、図1に示すように、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、図2に示すように、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを適宜に切り替えることができる。 According to this display device 10, as shown in FIG. 1, the display panel 11 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr, and as shown in FIG. 2, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr. It is possible to appropriately switch between these states.
 この表示装置10は、例えば、屋外に置くことができる。この場合、時間帯によっては、装置前面Frに太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる場合がある。また、このような時間帯では、太陽光を利用した発電が効率よく行えるのに対して、表示される画像は見難い。かかる表示装置10によれば、太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯では、図2に示すように、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置して発電することができる。これに対して、装置前面Frにおいて画面が見易い時間帯では、図1に示すように、装置前面Frにおいて、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けて配置して画像を表示することができる。このように、この表示装置10は、装置前面Frの状況に応じて適当な態様で使用することができる。 The display device 10 can be placed outdoors, for example. In this case, depending on the time of day, there may be a case where the screen of the display panel 11 becomes difficult to see due to strong sunlight hitting the front surface Fr. Further, in such a time zone, power generation using sunlight can be performed efficiently, but the displayed image is difficult to see. According to such a display device 10, in a time zone in which sunlight is strongly applied and the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 2, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr to generate power. be able to. On the other hand, in a time zone in which the screen is easy to see on the device front surface Fr, as shown in FIG. 1, the display panel 11 can be arranged facing the device front surface Fr on the device front surface Fr to display an image. Thus, the display device 10 can be used in an appropriate manner depending on the situation of the device front surface Fr.
 これにより、例えば、人通りの多い時間帯などでは、図1に示すように、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けることによって、インフォメーションディスプレイとして機能させることができる。また、装置前面Frに太陽光が照射され、装置前面Frにおいて画面が見難くなる時間帯では、例えば、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けることによって発電することができる。光電変換パネル12によって発電された電力は、蓄電池(図示省略)に蓄えることができ、インフォメーションディスプレイの電力として用いることが可能である。 Thus, for example, in a busy time zone, as shown in FIG. 1, the display panel 11 can be made to function as an information display by facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Moreover, in the time zone when the device front surface Fr is irradiated with sunlight and the screen is difficult to see on the device front surface Fr, for example, power can be generated by directing the photoelectric conversion panel 12 toward the device front surface Fr. The electric power generated by the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be stored in a storage battery (not shown), and can be used as information display power.
≪切替制御部13a≫
 次に切替機構13の制御を説明する。この形態では、表示装置10は、切替機構13を制御する切替制御部13aを備えている。
<< Switching control unit 13a >>
Next, control of the switching mechanism 13 will be described. In this embodiment, the display device 10 includes a switching control unit 13 a that controls the switching mechanism 13.
≪受光センサ13a1≫
 この形態では、表示装置10は、図1および図2に示すように、装置前面Frに向けて照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ13a1を備えている。切替制御部13aは、当該受光センサ13a1によって得られた受光情報に基づいて切替機構13を制御するように構成されている。かかる表示装置の制御方法は、例えば、受光センサ13a1によって受光情報を取得する受光情報取得ステップと、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替える切替ステップとを備えているとよい。ここで、切替ステップは、受光情報取得ステップで取得された受光情報に基づいて行われると良い。
<< Light receiving sensor 13a1 >>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the display device 10 includes a light receiving sensor 13 a 1 that receives external light emitted toward the device front surface Fr. The switching control unit 13a is configured to control the switching mechanism 13 based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 13a1. The display device control method includes, for example, a light reception information acquisition step of acquiring light reception information by the light reception sensor 13a1, a state in which the display panel 11 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr, and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 on the device front surface Fr. It is good to provide the switching step which switches the state arranged toward. Here, the switching step may be performed based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step.
 この場合、切替制御部13aは、例えば、受光情報に基づいて装置前面Frに照射される光の強さを検出し、検出された光の強さが予め定めた値(閾値A)よりも高い場合には、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置するように制御することができる。これにより、装置前面Frに太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる場合に、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置して発電することができる。 In this case, for example, the switching control unit 13a detects the intensity of light irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr based on the light reception information, and the detected light intensity is higher than a predetermined value (threshold A). In this case, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be controlled so as to be disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Thereby, when sunlight hits the apparatus front surface Fr strongly and it becomes difficult to see the screen of the display panel 11, it can arrange | position the photoelectric conversion panel 12 toward the apparatus front surface Fr, and can generate electric power.
 また、受光センサ13a1によって検出された光の強さが予め定めた値(閾値B)よりも低い場合には、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置され、かつ、表示パネル11に画像が表示されるように、表示装置10を制御するとよい。これにより、装置前面Frに強い光が当っておらず、かつ、表示パネル11の画面が見易い場合に、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けて配置して画像を表示することができる。 When the intensity of light detected by the light receiving sensor 13a1 is lower than a predetermined value (threshold value B), the display panel 11 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and an image is displayed on the display panel 11. The display device 10 may be controlled so as to be displayed. As a result, when strong light is not applied to the device front surface Fr and the screen of the display panel 11 is easy to see, the display panel 11 can be arranged facing the device front surface Fr to display an image.
 ところで、切替制御部13aは、受光センサ13a1によって得られた受光情報に基づいて切替機構13を制御する構成では、例えば、何らかの影響によって装置前面Frに影が生じ得る。そして、装置前面Frに影が生じることによって、受光センサ13a1で検知される受光情報が変動した場合に、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが不必要に切り替えられる可能性があると考えられる。 Incidentally, in the configuration in which the switching control unit 13a controls the switching mechanism 13 based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 13a1, for example, a shadow may be generated on the apparatus front surface Fr due to some influence. Then, it is considered that there is a possibility that the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be unnecessarily switched when the light reception information detected by the light reception sensor 13a1 changes due to a shadow on the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
 このため、装置前面Frに向けて配置されるパネルを、表示パネル11から光電変換パネル12に切り替える場合に設定する閾値Aと、光電変換パネル12から表示パネル11に切り替える場合に設定する閾値Bとは異なる値を設定するとよい。 For this reason, the threshold value A set when switching the panel arranged toward the apparatus front surface Fr from the display panel 11 to the photoelectric conversion panel 12 and the threshold value B set when switching from the photoelectric conversion panel 12 to the display panel 11 Should be set to different values.
 これにより、受光センサ13a1によって得られた受光情報が閾値付近において細かく変動する場合でも、その都度、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが切り替えられる事象を防止できる。また、さらにタイマーを設定し、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが切り替えられた後、一定期間、当該状態が維持されるように制御してもよい。これにより、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とを安定して切り替えることができる。 Thereby, even when the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor 13a1 fluctuates finely in the vicinity of the threshold, it is possible to prevent an event in which the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are switched each time. Further, a timer may be further set so that the state is maintained for a certain period after the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are switched. Thereby, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be switched stably.
≪タイマー13a2≫
 また、切替制御部13aの他の構成として、表示装置10は、例えば、図1に示すように、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替えるタイミングが設定されたタイマー13a2を備えていてもよい。
<< Timer 13a2 >>
As another configuration of the switching control unit 13a, for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the display device 10 includes a state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr, and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 in the device front surface Fr. The timer 13a2 in which the timing which switches to the state arrange | positioned toward may be set may be provided.
 例えば、装置前面Frに太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯が存在する。このような時間帯を考慮して、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替えるタイミングをタイマー13a2に設定するとよい。 For example, there is a time zone in which the screen F of the display panel 11 is difficult to see due to strong sunlight hitting the front surface Fr. In consideration of such a time zone, the timer 13a2 sets the timing for switching between the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr. Good.
 これにより、切替制御部13aは、タイマー13a2に基づいて切替機構13を制御することによって、装置前面Frに太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯では、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置することができる。そして、タイマー13a2に設定されたタイミングで、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態から表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態に切り替えることができる。 Thereby, the switching control unit 13a controls the switching mechanism 13 based on the timer 13a2, so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is in a time zone in which sunlight is strongly applied to the front surface Fr and the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see. Can be arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Then, at the timing set in the timer 13a2, it is possible to switch from the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr to the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr.
 また、タイマー13a2に基づく切替機構13の制御と、受光センサ13a1によって得られた受光情報に基づく切替機構13の制御とは、組み合わせることができる。図5は、かかる制御の一例を示すフロー図である。 Further, the control of the switching mechanism 13 based on the timer 13a2 and the control of the switching mechanism 13 based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 13a1 can be combined. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of such control.
 かかる制御では、まず図5に示すように、表示装置10に組み込まれた時計機能から現在時刻(t)を取得する(S1)。次に、取得された現在時刻(t)が、装置前面Frに太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯としてタイマー13a2に設定された時間帯(t1~t2)に含まれるか(t⊆(t1~t2))を判定する(S2)。次に、タイマー13a2で設定された時間帯に基づいて、現在時刻(t)が装置前面Frに太陽光が強く当って表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯(t1~t2)に含まれると判定された場合(YES)に、さらに受光センサ13a1によって得られた受光情報(v)が閾値(v1)よりも高いかを判定する(S3)。そして、当該判定に基づいて、予め定めた閾値(v1)よりも強い光を受光していると判定された場合(YES)に、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置するように制御する(S4)。また、上記判定処理(S2)において、取得された現在時刻(t)が、タイマー13a2に設定された時間帯(t1~t2)に含まれないと判定された場合(NO)や、上記判定処理(S3)において、受光センサ13a1によって得られた受光情報(v)が閾値(v1)よりも高くないと判定された場合(NO)には、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けて配置するように制御する(S5)。そして、上記S1~S5の処理を繰り返す。 In this control, first, as shown in FIG. 5, the current time (t) is acquired from the clock function incorporated in the display device 10 (S1). Next, the acquired current time (t) is included in the time zone (t1 to t2) set in the timer 13a2 as the time zone in which sunlight hits the front surface Fr of the apparatus and the screen of the display panel 11 becomes difficult to see. (T 判定 す る (t1 to t2)) is determined (S2). Next, based on the time zone set by the timer 13a2, the current time (t) is included in the time zone (t1 to t2) in which the screen on the display panel 11 is difficult to see due to strong sunlight hitting the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Is determined (YES), it is further determined whether the light reception information (v) obtained by the light reception sensor 13a1 is higher than the threshold value (v1) (S3). Then, based on this determination, when it is determined that light stronger than a predetermined threshold value (v1) is received (YES), control is performed so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. (S4). In the determination process (S2), when it is determined that the acquired current time (t) is not included in the time zone (t1 to t2) set in the timer 13a2 (NO), the determination process In (S3), when it is determined that the light reception information (v) obtained by the light reception sensor 13a1 is not higher than the threshold value (v1) (NO), the display panel 11 is arranged facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus. (S5). Then, the processes of S1 to S5 are repeated.
 図5に示す制御によれば、太陽光によって表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯としてタイマー13a2で設定された時間帯(t1~t2)において、実際に装置前面Frに十分な光が当っている場合に、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置されるように制御される。この制御によって、例えば、太陽光によって表示パネル11の画面が見難くなる時間帯としてタイマー13a2で設定された時間帯(t1~t2)であっても、曇りの日などで、太陽光の影響が弱い場合には、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置される。これにより、表示パネル11に画像を表示することができる。このように、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けて配置する状態と、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置する状態とを切り替える制御において、状況に応じたより適切な制御が可能になる。 According to the control shown in FIG. 5, in the time zone (t1 to t2) set by the timer 13a2 as the time zone in which the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see due to sunlight, sufficient light is actually applied to the front surface Fr of the apparatus. In this case, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is controlled so as to be arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. By this control, for example, even in the time zone (t1 to t2) set by the timer 13a2 as a time zone in which the screen of the display panel 11 is difficult to see due to sunlight, the influence of sunlight is affected on a cloudy day. If it is weak, the display panel 11 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Thereby, an image can be displayed on the display panel 11. As described above, in the control for switching between the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the apparatus front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the apparatus front surface Fr, more appropriate control according to the situation becomes possible. .
 また、タイマー13a2による制御では、表示装置10を視聴する人が多い時間帯、時間帯によって視聴する人の年齢層や性別が異なる場合に表示内容を変えることができる。例えば、繁華街では、休日と平日、さらに時間帯によって、表示装置10を視聴する人の年齢層や性別が異なる場合がある。このため、予め設定された曜日や時間帯によって、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに配置するように制御し、さらに、表示装置10を視聴する人の年齢層や性別に合った画像を表示パネル11に表示させることができる。また、この表示装置10は、装置前面Frに適宜に光電変換パネル12を配置することができる。 In addition, the control by the timer 13a2 can change the display contents when there are many people viewing the display device 10 and when the age group and gender of the viewers are different depending on the time zone. For example, in a downtown area, the age group and sex of the person who views the display device 10 may differ depending on holidays, weekdays, and time zones. For this reason, the display panel 11 is controlled to be arranged on the front surface Fr of the device according to a preset day of the week or time, and an image suitable for the age group and gender of the person who views the display device 10 is displayed on the display panel 11. Can be displayed. Further, in the display device 10, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be appropriately disposed on the front surface Fr of the device.
≪表示装置10A≫
 図6は、他の表示装置10Aを示している。この表示装置10Aは、図6に示すように、表示パネル11の表示面11a1と光電変換パネル12の受光面12a1とをそれぞれ外側に向けて、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが重ねられている。図6に示された例では、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とは、回転軸dを挟むように重ねられている。この場合、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とを重ねたユニットを、回転軸d周りに回転させるとよい。これによって、装置前面Frの予め定められた領域において、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替えることができる。このように、表示パネル11の表示面11a1と光電変換パネル12の受光面12a1とがそれぞれ外側を向くように、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが重ねられていることによって、表示装置10Aは、簡単な構成で具現化できる。
<< Display device 10A >>
FIG. 6 shows another display device 10A. As shown in FIG. 6, the display device 10 </ b> A has the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 overlapped with the display surface 11 a 1 of the display panel 11 and the light receiving surface 12 a 1 of the photoelectric conversion panel 12 facing outward. Yes. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are stacked so as to sandwich the rotation axis d. In this case, a unit in which the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are stacked may be rotated around the rotation axis d. As a result, in a predetermined region of the device front surface Fr, the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr can be switched. it can. As described above, the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are overlapped so that the display surface 11a1 of the display panel 11 and the light receiving surface 12a1 of the photoelectric conversion panel 12 face each other. It can be realized with a simple configuration.
≪表示装置10B≫
 また、図7及び図8は、他の表示装置10Bを示している。この表示装置10Bは、図7に示すように、回転軸dの周りに、表示パネル11と、光電変換パネル12と、光電変換パネル12に向けて光を集める集光レンズ16とが配置されている。
<< Display device 10B >>
7 and 8 show another display device 10B. As shown in FIG. 7, the display device 10 </ b> B includes a display panel 11, a photoelectric conversion panel 12, and a condensing lens 16 that collects light toward the photoelectric conversion panel 12 around the rotation axis d. Yes.
 この形態では、表示パネル11は、図7及び図8に示すように、回転軸dの周りに設定された三角柱の少なくとも1つの側面に沿って配置されている。集光レンズ16は三角柱の他の側面に沿って配置されている。また、光電変換パネル12は、集光レンズ16に対向する三角柱の内側の角部に配置されている。光電変換パネル12の受光面は集光レンズ16に向けられている。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the display panel 11 is arranged along at least one side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d. The condenser lens 16 is disposed along the other side surface of the triangular prism. Further, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged at the corner inside the triangular prism facing the condenser lens 16. The light receiving surface of the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is directed to the condenser lens 16.
 この場合、切替機構13は、図8に示すように、回転軸dを回転させて、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、図7に示すように、集光レンズ16が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替える。集光レンズ16が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態では、集光レンズ16によって集められた光が光電変換パネル12に入射する。集光レンズ16が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態では、図7に示すように、装置前面Fr側から集光レンズ16に入射した光が、集光レンズ16を通じて光電変換パネル12に集められる。これにより、光電変換パネル12は、装置前面Fr側から集光レンズ16に入射した光に基づいて発電することができる。 In this case, the switching mechanism 13 rotates the rotation axis d as shown in FIG. 8, and the display panel 11 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and the condensing lens 16 as shown in FIG. Is switched to the state of being arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. In a state where the condenser lens 16 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, the light collected by the condenser lens 16 enters the photoelectric conversion panel 12. In the state where the condenser lens 16 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, as shown in FIG. 7, the light incident on the condenser lens 16 from the front surface Fr side of the apparatus is collected on the photoelectric conversion panel 12 through the condenser lens 16. It is done. Thereby, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can generate electric power based on the light incident on the condenser lens 16 from the apparatus front surface Fr side.
≪集光レンズ16≫
 集光レンズ16としては、例えば、両凸レンズ、平凸レンズ、フレネルレンズ(Fresnel lens)を用いることができる。太陽光を受光する入射面が平坦で、太陽光を光電変換パネル12に向けて照射する出射面が略三角断面のフレネルレンズは、重量・コスト・使用環境で扱い易い。集光レンズ16には、例えば、通常の太陽電池モジュール(太陽光発電システム)などに一般的に使用される薄板ガラス、耐候性グレードのアクリル、ポリカーボネートなどを用いることができる。なお、集光レンズ16の材料は、上記に限定されるものではなく、これら材料を複層構成としたものでも良い。集光レンズ16は、光電変換パネル12に用いられる太陽電池素子の感度波長光の透過率が高く、耐候性を有する集光レンズ16を選択するとよい。また、これら材料に、集光レンズ16自体やその他の部材の紫外線劣化を防ぐ目的で、適当な紫外線吸収剤を添加してもよい。
≪Condenser lens 16≫
As the condenser lens 16, for example, a biconvex lens, a plano-convex lens, or a Fresnel lens can be used. A Fresnel lens having a flat incident surface for receiving sunlight and a substantially triangular cross section for emitting sunlight toward the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is easy to handle in terms of weight, cost, and usage environment. For the condenser lens 16, for example, thin glass, weather-resistant acrylic, polycarbonate, or the like generally used for a normal solar cell module (solar power generation system) or the like can be used. In addition, the material of the condensing lens 16 is not limited to the above, and these materials may have a multilayer structure. As the condensing lens 16, it is preferable to select a condensing lens 16 that has a high transmittance of sensitive wavelength light of a solar cell element used in the photoelectric conversion panel 12 and has weather resistance. In addition, an appropriate ultraviolet absorber may be added to these materials for the purpose of preventing ultraviolet degradation of the condenser lens 16 itself and other members.
 この場合、図7に示すように、集光レンズ16によって、光を集めることができるので、光電変換パネル12を小さくできる。光電変換パネル12は、集光レンズ16に比べて高価である。このため、回転軸dの周りに設定された三角柱の1つの側面に光電変換パネル12を配置する場合(図2参照)に比べて、集光レンズ16を用いた形態では、表示装置10の製造コストを低く抑えることができる。 In this case, as shown in FIG. 7, since the light can be collected by the condenser lens 16, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be made small. The photoelectric conversion panel 12 is more expensive than the condenser lens 16. For this reason, compared with the case where the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged on one side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d (see FIG. 2), the display device 10 is manufactured in the form using the condenser lens 16. Cost can be kept low.
 また、かかる表示装置10は、小型化が可能であり、例えば、両側の三角形の1辺が数cm程度(例えば、約1cm~5cm程度)の三角柱に構成することができる。そして、表示装置10を複数並べることによって、画像表示エリアをより細かく変更することが可能な画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイを構成することができる。 Further, the display device 10 can be miniaturized, and for example, can be configured as a triangular prism having one side of a triangle on both sides of about several cm (for example, about 1 cm to 5 cm). Then, by arranging a plurality of display devices 10, it is possible to configure an image display area variable display that can change the image display area more finely.
≪画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200≫
 図9及び図10は、表示装置10を複数並べた画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200を示す平面図である。
<< Image display area variable display 200 >>
9 and 10 are plan views showing an image display area variable display 200 in which a plurality of display devices 10 are arranged.
 画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、図9及び図15に示すように、表示パネルが1つの画面を構成し得るように複数の表示装置10が並べられている。また、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、複数の表示装置10によって構成される画像表示エリアを変更する画像表示エリア変更部210を備えている。 As shown in FIGS. 9 and 15, the image display area variable display 200 has a plurality of display devices 10 arranged so that the display panel can constitute one screen. The image display area variable display 200 includes an image display area changing unit 210 that changes an image display area constituted by the plurality of display devices 10.
≪画像表示エリア変更部210≫
 画像表示エリア変更部210は、各表示装置10の切替機構13をそれぞれ制御する。これにより、画像表示エリア変更部210は、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とを切り替えて、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の画像表示エリアを変更する。
<< Image Display Area Changing Unit 210 >>
The image display area changing unit 210 controls the switching mechanism 13 of each display device 10. As a result, the image display area changing unit 210 switches between the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr. The image display area of the variable display 200 is changed.
 画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の任意のエリアに画像表示エリアを設定することができる。例えば、図9に示すように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の右斜め上側に画像表示エリアAを設定することができる。また、画像表示エリア変更部210は、図10に示すように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の下部に画像表示エリアAを設定することができる。 The image display area changing unit 210 can set an image display area in an arbitrary area of the image display area variable display 200. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the image display area A can be set on the upper right side of the image display area variable display 200. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the image display area changing unit 210 can set the image display area A at the lower part of the image display area variable display 200.
 この場合、画像表示エリア変更部210は、当該画像表示エリアAでは、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向くように表示装置10を制御するとよい。また、この際、当該画像表示エリアAの外側では、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向くように表示装置10を制御するとよい。これにより、画像表示エリアAにおいて一つの画像を表示するとともに、当該画像表示エリアAの外側では、光電変換パネル12によって発電することができる。 In this case, the image display area changing unit 210 may control the display device 10 in the image display area A so that the display panel 11 faces the front surface Fr of the device. At this time, outside the image display area A, the display device 10 may be controlled so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 faces the device front surface Fr. Thus, one image can be displayed in the image display area A, and power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panel 12 outside the image display area A.
≪受光センサ220≫
 以下、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200について、種々の形態を例示する。
 画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、例えば、図9に示すように、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ220を備えていてもよい。この場合、画像表示エリア変更部210は、受光センサ220によって得られた受光情報に基づいて画像表示エリアAを変更するとよい。なお、図9及び図10に示す形態では、受光センサ220は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200のフレーム201に設けられている。
<< Light receiving sensor 220 >>
Hereinafter, various forms of the image display area variable display 200 will be exemplified.
For example, as shown in FIG. 9, the image display area variable display 200 may include a light receiving sensor 220 that receives external light applied to the apparatus front surface Fr. In this case, the image display area changing unit 210 may change the image display area A based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 220. 9 and 10, the light receiving sensor 220 is provided on the frame 201 of the image display area variable display 200.
≪受光センサ220の他の配置例≫
 図11は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の受光センサ220の他の配置例を示している。受光センサ220は、例えば、図11に示すように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Fr側の側面において、複数の位置に設けられていてもよい。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の位置で太陽光を検出できる。図11に示す例では、受光センサ220は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部、上下左右、一対の対角位置のそれぞれ9箇所に設けられている。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200のどの位置に太陽光が強く当っているかを検知することができる。そして、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に対して、視認するのに適当な位置に、画像表示エリアA(図9参照)を設定することができる。なお、受光センサ220は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の位置に設けられているとよく、図11に示す例に限定されない。
<< Other arrangement examples of the light receiving sensor 220 >>
FIG. 11 shows another arrangement example of the light receiving sensors 220 of the image display area variable display 200. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the light receiving sensor 220 may be provided at a plurality of positions on the side surface of the image display area variable display 200 on the apparatus front side Fr side. Thereby, sunlight can be detected at a plurality of positions of the image display area variable display 200. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the light receiving sensors 220 are provided at nine locations, that is, the central portion of the image display area variable display 200, up and down, left and right, and a pair of diagonal positions. Thereby, it is possible to detect which position of the image display area variable display 200 is strongly exposed to sunlight. Then, the image display area A (see FIG. 9) can be set at a position suitable for visual recognition with respect to the image display area variable display 200. The light receiving sensors 220 may be provided at a plurality of positions of the image display area variable display 200 and are not limited to the example shown in FIG.
≪画像表示エリア変更部210の制御≫
 また、画像表示エリア変更部210は、予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた位置において光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態になるように、画像表示エリアAを変更してもよい。これにより、太陽光が強く当っている位置で、光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置することができるので、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は効率よく発電できる。
<< Control of Image Display Area Changing Unit 210 >>
In addition, the image display area changing unit 210 is arranged so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is placed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus at a position where light reception information exceeding a predetermined reference value is obtained. May be changed. Thereby, since the photoelectric conversion panel 12 can be arrange | positioned toward the apparatus front surface Fr in the position which sunlight has struck strongly, the image display area variable display 200 can generate electric power efficiently.
 また、画像表示エリア変更部210は、予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた受光センサ220の数が、予め定められた数よりも多くなった場合に、全ての表示装置10の光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置するように構成してもよい。 Further, the image display area changing unit 210, when the number of the light receiving sensors 220 from which the light receiving information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained is larger than the predetermined number, You may comprise so that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 may be arrange | positioned toward the apparatus front surface Fr.
 例えば、図11に示すように、画像表示エリア変更部210に配置された複数の受光センサ220のうち多くの受光センサ220から予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られる場合がある。この場合には、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frに、概ね太陽光が強く当っていると考えられる。上記の構成によれば、画像表示エリア変更部210によって、全ての表示装置10の光電変換パネル12が、装置前面Frに向けて配置される。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は効率よく発電することができる。 For example, as shown in FIG. 11, light reception information exceeding a predetermined reference value may be obtained from many light reception sensors 220 among the plurality of light reception sensors 220 arranged in the image display area changing unit 210. In this case, it is considered that sunlight is generally strongly applied to the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200. According to said structure, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 of all the display apparatuses 10 is arrange | positioned by the image display area change part 210 toward the apparatus front surface Fr. Thereby, the image display area variable display 200 can generate electric power efficiently.
 また、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分は視聴者の視界に入りやすい。画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分に強い光が当って画像が見難い場合に、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分を除いて画像表示エリアを無理に設定しても、視聴者にストレスを生じさせることがある。このため、画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分に配置された受光センサ220(c)から得られた受光情報が、予め定められた基準値を上回った場合に、全ての表示装置10の光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置するように制御してもよい。上記の制御によれば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分に配置された受光センサ220(c)から得られた受光情報が、予め定められた基準値を上回った場合に、全ての表示装置10の光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置される。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分に強い光が当って画像が見難い場合に、無理に画像を表示せず、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200全体を用いて発電することができる。 Also, the central portion of the image display area variable display 200 is easy to enter the viewer's field of view. When strong light hits the central part of the image display area variable display 200 and it is difficult to see the image, even if the image display area is forcibly set except for the central part of the image display area variable display 200, the viewer is stressed. May cause. For this reason, the image display area changing unit 210, when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 (c) disposed in the central portion of the image display area variable display 200 exceeds a predetermined reference value, You may control to arrange the photoelectric conversion panels 12 of all the display apparatuses 10 toward the apparatus front surface Fr. According to the above control, when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 (c) disposed in the central portion of the image display area variable display 200 exceeds a predetermined reference value, all display devices are displayed. Ten photoelectric conversion panels 12 are arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus. As a result, when strong light hits the central portion of the image display area variable display 200 and it is difficult to see the image, power can be generated using the entire image display area variable display 200 without forcibly displaying the image.
 また、画像表示エリア変更部210は、受光センサ220から得られた受光情報が予め定められた時間に継続して基準値を上回った場合に、受光情報が基準値を上回った場合の所定の処理を行うように構成してもよい。 In addition, the image display area changing unit 210 performs predetermined processing when the light reception information exceeds the reference value when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 continuously exceeds the reference value at a predetermined time. You may comprise so that it may perform.
 例えば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、屋外に設置された場合には、晴れた日でも雲などの影響で、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に影が生じる場合がある。この場合、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に照射される外部光が一時的に遮られる。画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に照射される外部光が一時的に遮られると、受光センサ220によって得られる受光情報が一時的に大きく変化する。このように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frに照射される外部光の輝度が短時間に目まぐるしく変化する場合がある。 For example, when the image display area variable display 200 is installed outdoors, a shadow may occur on the image display area variable display 200 due to the influence of clouds or the like even on a sunny day. In this case, the external light irradiated on the image display area variable display 200 is temporarily blocked. When the external light applied to the image display area variable display 200 is temporarily blocked, the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor 220 is temporarily greatly changed. As described above, the luminance of the external light applied to the apparatus front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200 may change rapidly in a short time.
 この際、一時的に大きく変化した受光情報に基づいて、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とが都度切り替えられる。このように、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とが都度切り替えられると、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、安定して画像を表示することができない。この場合、視聴者にストレスを与えかねないし、発電効率も悪くなる。このため、画像表示エリア変更部210は、受光センサ220から得られた受光情報が予め定められた時間に継続して基準値を上回った場合に、受光情報が基準値を上回った場合の所定の処理を行うように構成することによって、表示装置10の上記切り替えが不必要に行われるのを防止できる。 At this time, the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr are switched each time based on the light reception information that has temporarily changed greatly. It is done. In this way, when the state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr are switched each time, the image display area variable display 200 is The image cannot be displayed stably. In this case, the viewer may be stressed and the power generation efficiency is also deteriorated. For this reason, the image display area changing unit 210 performs predetermined processing when the light reception information exceeds the reference value when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 continuously exceeds the reference value at a predetermined time. By configuring so as to perform the processing, it is possible to prevent the switching of the display device 10 from being performed unnecessarily.
 この際、基準値は、予め定められた異なるタイミングにおいて、受光センサによって得られた受光情報の差分に対して設定してもよい。この場合、受光センサによって得られた受光情報の経時的な変化量を反映して表示装置10を切り替えることができる。かかる画像表示エリア変更部210によれば、外部光の明るさが一時的に大きく変化した場合であっても、不必要に表示装置10が切り替えられるのを防止できる。 At this time, the reference value may be set with respect to the difference of the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor at different predetermined timings. In this case, it is possible to switch the display device 10 by reflecting the change over time of the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor. According to the image display area changing unit 210, it is possible to prevent the display device 10 from being unnecessarily switched even when the brightness of the external light changes temporarily.
 例えば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に太陽光が強く当っているときに、雲の影響で一時的に陰ができた場合において、受光センサ220から取得された受光情報と、5分前の受光情報との差分を算出する。この場合、太陽光が強く当っているときに、5分後に雲の影響で一時的に陰ができた場合には、太陽光が強く当っているときに得られた受光情報と、当該5分後の受光情報との差分は大きくなる。さらに、5分後において雲の影響で陰が継続している場合には、当該5分後の受光情報とその5分前の受光情報との差分は小さくなる。このように、予め定められた異なるタイミングにおいて、受光センサによって得られた受光情報の差分によって、受光センサ220から得られた受光情報の変化が継続したものか否かを判定できるとともに、一時的に大きく変化した受光情報に基づいて、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態とが都度切り替えられるのを防止できる。この場合、予め定められた異なるタイミングにおいて、受光センサによって得られた受光情報の差分として、5分前の受光情報との差分を例示したが、予め定められた異なるタイミングは、5分前に限定されず、任意に決めることができる。例えば、予め定められた複数の異なるタイミングにおいて受光情報の差分を取り、当該差分に対して基準値を設定してもよい。 For example, when the image display area variable display 200 is strongly lit by sunlight, the light reception information acquired from the light receiving sensor 220 and the light reception information five minutes before when the shadow is temporarily made under the influence of clouds. The difference is calculated. In this case, when the sun is shining strongly, if the shadow is temporarily shaded after 5 minutes, the received light information obtained when the sun is shining strongly and the 5 minutes The difference from the later received light information becomes large. Further, when the shade continues under the influence of the cloud after 5 minutes, the difference between the received light information after 5 minutes and the received light information before 5 minutes becomes small. In this way, at a predetermined different timing, it is possible to determine whether or not the change in the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220 is continued based on the difference in the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor, and temporarily It is possible to prevent the display panel 11 from being arranged toward the device front surface Fr and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed from the device front surface Fr from being switched each time based on the greatly changed light reception information. In this case, the difference from the received light information five minutes ago is illustrated as the difference of the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensor at different predetermined timings. However, the predetermined different timing is limited to five minutes ago. It can be decided arbitrarily. For example, the difference between the received light information may be taken at a plurality of predetermined different timings, and a reference value may be set for the difference.
 また、図9及び図10に示すように、表示装置10が複数並べられた画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200において、受光センサ220は各表示装置10にそれぞれ設けられていてもよい。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frにおいてより細かく受光情報を得ることができ、より適切な切り替え制御が行える。 Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, in the image display area variable display 200 in which a plurality of display devices 10 are arranged, the light receiving sensor 220 may be provided in each display device 10. As a result, the light reception information can be obtained more finely on the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200, and more appropriate switching control can be performed.
≪受光センサ220の他の配置例≫
 また、受光センサ220を設ける位置は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200のフレーム201に限定されない。以下に、受光センサ220を設ける位置を種々例示する。ここで、図12から図14は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の表示装置10(図9又は図10参照)によって構成される1つの画面を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って受光センサ220が配置された形態をそれぞれ示している。
<< Other arrangement examples of the light receiving sensor 220 >>
The position where the light receiving sensor 220 is provided is not limited to the frame 201 of the image display area variable display 200. Hereinafter, various positions where the light receiving sensor 220 is provided will be exemplified. Here, FIG. 12 to FIG. 14 are along a line set so as to traverse or traverse one screen constituted by a plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 10) of the image display area variable display 200. In the figure, the light receiving sensor 220 is disposed.
 例えば、図12に示す例では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の表示装置10によって構成される1つの画面が略方形形状である。受光センサ220は、当該1つの画面の四辺のうち少なくとも対向した二辺の中間点を結ぶ線L1,L2に沿って配置されている。 For example, in the example shown in FIG. 12, one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices 10 of the image display area variable display 200 has a substantially square shape. The light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along lines L1 and L2 connecting intermediate points of at least two opposite sides of the four sides of the one screen.
 この場合、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、当該中間点を結ぶ線に沿って装置前面Frに照射される外部光の受光情報を得ることができる。この場合、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の表示装置10(図9又は図10参照)にそれぞれ受光センサ220を配置する場合に比べて、受光センサ220の配置数を少なくすることができる。また、外部光の受光情報を取得するための回路や配線を簡素化させることができ、製造コストを低く抑えることができる。 In this case, the image display area variable display 200 can obtain the light reception information of the external light irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr along the line connecting the intermediate points. In this case, the number of the light receiving sensors 220 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are respectively disposed on the plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or 10) of the image display area variable display 200. Further, it is possible to simplify the circuit and wiring for acquiring the received light information of the external light, and the manufacturing cost can be kept low.
 また、図12に示すように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、全体として矩形の表示領域を有している場合において、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の短い側の二辺の中間点を結ぶ線L1に沿って受光センサ220が配置されている。かかる線L1に沿って配置された受光センサ220によって、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の長手方向における外部光の受光情報を得ることができる。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200全体を照射する外部光の輝度分布を大まかに反映した受光情報を得ることができる。また、図12に示すように、この形態では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の長い側の二辺の中間点を結ぶ線L2に沿って受光センサ220が配置されている。かかる線L2に沿って配置された受光センサ220によって、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の短手方向における外部光の受光情報を得ることができる。 As shown in FIG. 12, when the image display area variable display 200 has a rectangular display area as a whole, a line L1 connecting the midpoints of the two short sides of the image display area variable display 200 is shown. A light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along the line. With the light receiving sensor 220 arranged along the line L1, the light receiving information of the external light in the longitudinal direction of the image display area variable display 200 can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire image display area variable display 200. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the image display area variable display 200 has the light receiving sensor 220 arranged along a line L <b> 2 connecting the middle points of the two long sides of the image display area variable display 200. Yes. With the light receiving sensor 220 arranged along the line L2, the light receiving information of the external light in the short direction of the image display area variable display 200 can be obtained.
 図13に示す形態では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、複数の表示装置10(図9又は図10参照)によって構成される1つの画面が略方形形状である。この形態では、受光センサ220は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の四辺のうち対向した二辺(L3、L4)、(L5、L6)に沿った周縁部に配置されている。 In the form shown in FIG. 13, the image display area variable display 200 has one screen formed by a plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 10) having a substantially square shape. In this embodiment, the light receiving sensor 220 is disposed at the peripheral edge along two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200.
 これにより、概ね、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200全体に受光センサ220が分散配置されているので、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200全体を照射する外部光の輝度分布を大まかに反映した受光情報を得ることができる。また、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の表示装置10(図9又は図10参照)にそれぞれ受光センサ220を配置する場合に比べて、受光センサ220の配置数を少なくできる。また、外部光の受光情報を取得するための回路や配線を簡素化でき、製造コストを低く抑えることができる。さらに、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の四辺の周縁部は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の中央部分を中心に画像を表示する場合に、受光センサ220が配置されていても視聴者が気付きにくい部位である。図13に示す形態では、受光センサ220が視聴者から気付かれにくいため、受光センサ220が配置されたことによって、表示される画像に与える影響を小さくできる。 Thereby, since the light receiving sensors 220 are generally distributed over the entire image display area variable display 200, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire image display area variable display 200. it can. In addition, the number of the light receiving sensors 220 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are respectively disposed on the plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or 10) of the image display area variable display 200. In addition, a circuit and wiring for acquiring light reception information of external light can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, the peripheral edges of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200 are portions that are difficult for the viewer to notice even if the light receiving sensor 220 is arranged when an image is displayed around the central portion of the image display area variable display 200. is there. In the form shown in FIG. 13, since the light receiving sensor 220 is not easily noticed by the viewer, the influence of the light receiving sensor 220 on the displayed image can be reduced.
 なお、図13に示す例では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の四辺の対向した二辺(L3、L4)、(L5、L6)の周縁部に、それぞれ受光センサ220が配置されている。受光センサ220は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の四辺の対向した二辺(L3、L4)、(L5、L6)のうち、何れか一方の対向した二辺の周縁部のみに配置されていてもよい。 In the example shown in FIG. 13, the light receiving sensors 220 are disposed on the peripheral portions of two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200, respectively. The light receiving sensor 220 may be disposed only on the peripheral part of one of the two opposite sides (L3, L4), (L5, L6) of the four sides of the image display area variable display 200. Good.
 また、図14に示す形態では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、複数の表示装置10(図9又は図10参照)によって構成される1つの画面が略方形形状である。受光センサ220は、1つの画面の対角線L7,L8に沿って配置されている。 Further, in the form shown in FIG. 14, the image display area variable display 200 has a substantially square shape on one screen constituted by a plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 10). The light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along the diagonal lines L7 and L8 of one screen.
 この場合、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の表示装置10(図9又は図10参照)にそれぞれ受光センサ220を配置する場合に比べて、受光センサ220の配置数を少なくできる。また、外部光の受光情報を取得するための回路や配線を簡素化でき、製造コストを低く抑えることができる。また、概ね、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200全体に受光センサ220が分散配置されている。このため、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200全体を照射する外部光の輝度分布を大まかに反映した受光情報を得ることができる。なお、図14に示す例では、1つの画面の2つの対角線L7,L8のそれぞれに沿って受光センサ220が配置されているが、受光センサ220は、1つの画面の2つの対角線L7,L8のうち、何れか一方のみに沿って配置されていてもよい。 In this case, the number of the light receiving sensors 220 can be reduced as compared with the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are respectively disposed on the plurality of display devices 10 (see FIG. 9 or 10) of the image display area variable display 200. In addition, a circuit and wiring for acquiring light reception information of external light can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced. In general, the light receiving sensors 220 are distributed over the entire image display area variable display 200. Therefore, it is possible to obtain light reception information that roughly reflects the luminance distribution of the external light that irradiates the entire image display area variable display 200. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the light receiving sensor 220 is arranged along each of the two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of one screen. However, the light receiving sensor 220 has two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of one screen. Of these, it may be arranged along only one of them.
≪画像表示エリア変更部210の制御≫
 次に、図11~図14に示すように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の位置に受光センサ220が設けられている場合について、画像表示エリア変更部210の制御を説明する。
<< Control of Image Display Area Changing Unit 210 >>
Next, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the control of the image display area changing unit 210 in the case where the light receiving sensors 220 are provided at a plurality of positions of the image display area variable display 200 will be described.
 画像表示エリア変更部210は、受光センサ220のうち予め定められた基準となる受光センサによって得られた受光情報と、その他の受光センサによって得られた受光情報との差分を求め、当該差分に基づいて画像表示エリアを設定してもよい。この場合、画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frに照射される外部光の輝度分布を正確に反映して、各表示装置10(図9及び図10参照)を制御できる。 The image display area changing unit 210 obtains a difference between light reception information obtained by a light reception sensor that is a predetermined reference among the light reception sensors 220 and light reception information obtained by other light reception sensors, and based on the difference. The image display area may be set. In this case, the image display area changing unit 210 accurately reflects the luminance distribution of the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200 to reflect each display device 10 (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Can be controlled.
 この場合、基準となる受光センサ220が、予め設定されているとよい。また、基準となる受光センサ220によって得られた受光情報と、その他の受光センサ220によって得られた受光情報との差分に対して画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の各表示装置10をどのように制御するかについては、画像表示エリア変更部210に予め設定しておいてもよい。 In this case, the reference light receiving sensor 220 may be set in advance. Further, how each display device 10 of the image display area variable display 200 is controlled with respect to the difference between the light reception information obtained by the reference light reception sensor 220 and the light reception information obtained by the other light reception sensors 220. This may be set in the image display area changing unit 210 in advance.
≪画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の他の形態≫
 以下、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の他の形態を説明する。
 画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、上述したように、表示パネル11(図1参照)が1つの画面を構成し得るように複数の表示装置10が並べられている。そして、各表示装置10の切替機構13をそれぞれ制御することによって、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態(図1参照)と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態(図2参照)とが切り替えられる。画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、複数の表示装置10によって構成される画像表示エリアAを変更する画像表示エリア変更部210を備えている。
<< Other forms of the image display area variable display 200 >>
Hereinafter, other forms of the image display area variable display 200 will be described.
As described above, in the image display area variable display 200, a plurality of display devices 10 are arranged so that the display panel 11 (see FIG. 1) can form one screen. Then, by controlling the switching mechanism 13 of each display device 10, the display panel 11 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr (see FIG. 1), and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr. The switched state (see FIG. 2) is switched. The image display area variable display 200 includes an image display area changing unit 210 that changes an image display area A configured by a plurality of display devices 10.
≪画像表示エリア変更タイマー230≫
 画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、図9及び図10に示すように、画像表示エリアAを変更する時間が設定された画像表示エリア変更タイマー230を備えていてもよい。この場合、画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像表示エリア変更タイマー230に基づいて、予め定められた時間帯において予め定められた画像表示エリアを設定することができる。
<< Image display area change timer 230 >>
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the image display area variable display 200 may include an image display area change timer 230 in which a time for changing the image display area A is set. In this case, the image display area changing unit 210 can set a predetermined image display area in a predetermined time zone based on the image display area change timer 230.
 例えば、画像表示エリア変更タイマー230に設定された第1の時間帯では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の各表示装置10を、表示パネル11が装置前面Fr面に向けて配置された状態(図1参照)にし、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の全体で画像を表示してもよい。また、他の時間帯では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の各表示装置10を、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態(図2参照)にして、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の全体で光電変換を行ってもよい。この場合、例えば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に太陽光が良く当たる時間帯においては、各表示装置10の光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態(図2参照)になるように、画像表示エリア変更タイマー230を設定するとよい。 For example, in the first time zone set in the image display area change timer 230, each display device 10 of the image display area variable display 200 is in a state where the display panel 11 is arranged facing the front surface Fr of the device (FIG. 1). The image may be displayed on the entire image display area variable display 200. In other time zones, each display device 10 of the image display area variable display 200 is set in a state where the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the device (see FIG. 2), and the image display area variable display 200 is displayed. Alternatively, photoelectric conversion may be performed as a whole. In this case, for example, in a time zone in which sunlight hits the image display area variable display 200 well, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 of each display device 10 is in a state of being arranged toward the device front surface Fr (see FIG. 2). In addition, the image display area change timer 230 may be set.
≪画像制御部240≫
 また、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、図9及び図10に示すように、画像表示エリア変更部210によって変更された画像表示エリアAに応じて、画像表示エリアAに表示させる画像を変更する画像制御部240を備えていてもよい。
<< Image Control Unit 240 >>
Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the image display area variable display 200 is an image that changes the image displayed in the image display area A according to the image display area A changed by the image display area changing unit 210. A control unit 240 may be provided.
 例えば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の全体で1つの画像を表示する場合と、図9のように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の右上に設定された画像表示エリアAに画像を表示する場合とでは、画像の大きさを変える必要がある。 For example, when one image is displayed on the entire image display area variable display 200 and when an image is displayed on the image display area A set at the upper right of the image display area variable display 200 as shown in FIG. It is necessary to change the size of the image.
 この画像制御部240は、画像表示エリア変更部210によって変更された画像表示エリアA(図9参照)に応じて、画像表示エリアに表示させる画像の大きさを変更する機能を備えている。これにより、図9に示すように、画像表示エリアAのサイズが変更された場合でも、適切に画像を表示することができる。 The image control unit 240 has a function of changing the size of an image displayed in the image display area in accordance with the image display area A (see FIG. 9) changed by the image display area changing unit 210. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 9, even when the size of the image display area A is changed, an image can be appropriately displayed.
 また、例えば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の全体で1つの画像を表示する場合と、図10のように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の下部に横長に設定された画像表示エリアAに画像を表示する場合とでは、アスペクト比(縦横比)が大きく変わってしまう。このため画像自体を変える必要がある。 Further, for example, when one image is displayed on the entire image display area variable display 200, and as shown in FIG. 10, an image is displayed in the image display area A set horizontally at the bottom of the image display area variable display 200. In this case, the aspect ratio (aspect ratio) changes greatly. For this reason, it is necessary to change the image itself.
≪画像記憶部250≫
 この画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、表示装置10によって構成される1つの画面の一部に表示される部分表示用画像を含んだ複数の画像を記憶した画像記憶部250を備えている。この場合、画像制御部240は、画像表示エリア変更部210によって変更された画像表示エリアAに基づいて、画像記憶部250に記憶された複数の画像から画像表示エリアAに表示させるのに適当な画像を選択し、当該画像表示エリアAに表示することができる。これにより、アスペクト比が大きく変わるような画像表示エリアAの変更が行われた場合でも、変更された画像表示エリアAに適切な画像を表示することができる。
<< Image Storage Unit 250 >>
The image display area variable display 200 includes an image storage unit 250 that stores a plurality of images including partial display images displayed on a part of one screen configured by the display device 10. In this case, the image control unit 240 is suitable for displaying in the image display area A from a plurality of images stored in the image storage unit 250 based on the image display area A changed by the image display area changing unit 210. An image can be selected and displayed in the image display area A. Thus, even when the image display area A is changed so that the aspect ratio changes greatly, an appropriate image can be displayed in the changed image display area A.
≪画像表示システム400、外部処理装置300≫
 また、例えば、図9及び図10に示すように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200と、外部処理装置300とを備えた画像表示システム400を構成してもよい。画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200と外部処理装置300とは相互に通信可能な通信装置を備えているとよい。また、外部処理装置300は、例えば、インターネットのような相互に通信可能な通信ネットワークを通じて、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200から情報を取得し、かつ、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200を制御できるように構成するとよい。これにより、例えば、外部処理装置300を介し、いわゆるデジタルサイネージ(Digital Signage=電子看板)による画像表示エリアAの変更や、画像の変更を行うことができる。なお、ここで、「デジタルサイネージ」とは、表示と通信にデジタル技術を活用して平面ディスプレイやプロジェクタなどによって映像や情報を表示する広告媒体をいう。
<< Image Display System 400, External Processing Apparatus 300 >>
Also, for example, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, an image display system 400 including an image display area variable display 200 and an external processing device 300 may be configured. The image display area variable display 200 and the external processing device 300 may include a communication device capable of communicating with each other. Further, for example, the external processing device 300 is configured to acquire information from the image display area variable display 200 and to control the image display area variable display 200 through a communication network such as the Internet that can communicate with each other. Good. Thus, for example, the image display area A can be changed or the image can be changed by so-called digital signage (digital signage) via the external processing device 300. Here, “digital signage” refers to an advertising medium that displays video and information on a flat display, projector, or the like using digital technology for display and communication.
 この場合、外部処理装置300は、例えば、画像表示エリア変更部210によって変更された画像表示エリアAに応じて、当該画像表示エリアAに表示する画像信号を画像制御部240に送るように構成することができる。この場合、外部処理装置300によって、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に表示させる画像を制御することができる。 In this case, the external processing device 300 is configured to send an image signal to be displayed in the image display area A to the image control unit 240 according to the image display area A changed by the image display area changing unit 210, for example. be able to. In this case, the image displayed on the image display area variable display 200 can be controlled by the external processing device 300.
 また、この画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ220を備えている。この場合、外部処理装置300は、受光センサ220から得られる受光情報に基づいて画像表示エリアAに表示する画像信号を設定してもよい。この場合、外部処理装置300を通じて、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frに照射される外部光に応じて、適当な画像表示エリアAの設定や画像の変更を行うことができる。 The image display area variable display 200 includes a light receiving sensor 220 that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus. In this case, the external processing device 300 may set an image signal to be displayed in the image display area A based on the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220. In this case, an appropriate image display area A can be set and an image can be changed through the external processing device 300 in accordance with the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200.
≪画像変更設定タイマー310≫
 また、この外部処理装置300は、画像表示エリアAに表示する画像信号を変更するタイミングが設定された画像変更設定タイマー310と、画像記憶部320とを備えている。画像記憶部320は、種々の画像を記憶している。この場合、外部処理装置300は、画像変更設定タイマー310に設定された所定のタイミングで、画像表示エリアAを変更できる。また、画像表示エリアAに表示する画像には、例えば、外部処理装置300の画像記憶部320に記憶された画像を用いることができる。
<< Image change setting timer 310 >>
The external processing apparatus 300 includes an image change setting timer 310 in which a timing for changing an image signal displayed in the image display area A is set, and an image storage unit 320. The image storage unit 320 stores various images. In this case, the external processing apparatus 300 can change the image display area A at a predetermined timing set in the image change setting timer 310. For example, an image stored in the image storage unit 320 of the external processing device 300 can be used as the image displayed in the image display area A.
 また、外部処理装置300は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に表示させる画像を適当に変更するように構成することができる。この場合、例えば、繁華街において、通勤する人が多い平日の午前中の通勤時間帯と、買い物客が多い休日のお昼の時間帯などで、表示する画像を変えるように画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200を制御することができる。このように、外部処理装置300によって画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に表示させる画像を変更できるので、視聴者層を絞った広告の提供を行うことが容易になる。このように、外部処理装置300を介し、いわゆるデジタルサイネージにおける画像表示エリアAの変更や、画像の変更を行うことができる。 Further, the external processing device 300 can be configured to appropriately change the image to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200. In this case, for example, in a busy street, the image display area variable display 200 is changed so that the image to be displayed is changed in the morning commuting time on weekdays when there are many commuting people and the noon time on a holiday with many shoppers. Can be controlled. Thus, since the image displayed on the image display area variable display 200 can be changed by the external processing device 300, it is easy to provide an advertisement with a narrowed audience. As described above, the image display area A and the image can be changed through so-called digital signage via the external processing device 300.
 また、この画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、表示パネル11が装置前面Fr面に向けて配置された状態(図1参照)と、光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態(図2参照)とに各表示装置10の状態を切り替えることができる。このため、上記のような広告を表示させない時間帯であって、太陽光が画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frによく当たる時間帯では、各表示装置10を光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態(図2参照)に切り替えて発電を行うことができる。 The image display area variable display 200 includes a state in which the display panel 11 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus (see FIG. 1) and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus (see FIG. 1). 2), the state of each display device 10 can be switched. For this reason, in the time zone in which the advertisement is not displayed as described above, and in the time zone in which sunlight often hits the device front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200, the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is connected to the device front surface Fr. The power can be generated by switching to the state (see FIG. 2) arranged toward the front.
≪画像情報入力部260≫
 また、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、図9及び図10に示すように、複数の表示装置10によって構成される1つの画面に表示する画像情報が入力される画像情報入力部260を備えていてもよい。画像情報入力部260には、例えば、外部処理装置300から画像情報が入力される。画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像情報入力部260に入力された画像情報に基づいて、複数の表示装置10によって構成される1つの画面に画像を表示する画像表示エリアAを設定する。このように、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、受光センサ220や画像表示エリア変更タイマー230などによらず、画像情報入力部260に入力された画像情報に基づいて、画像表示エリアAが設定されるように構成することができる。
<< Image Information Input Unit 260 >>
Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the image display area variable display 200 includes an image information input unit 260 for inputting image information to be displayed on one screen configured by the plurality of display devices 10. Also good. For example, image information is input to the image information input unit 260 from the external processing device 300. Based on the image information input to the image information input unit 260, the image display area changing unit 210 sets an image display area A for displaying an image on one screen configured by the plurality of display devices 10. As described above, in the image display area variable display 200, the image display area A is set based on the image information input to the image information input unit 260 regardless of the light receiving sensor 220, the image display area change timer 230, or the like. Can be configured as follows.
 この場合、画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の複数の表示装置10のうち、前記画像表示エリアA内では表示装置10の表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けて配置してもよい。さらに、この場合、画像表示エリア変更部210は、画像表示エリアを除いたエリアでは表示装置10の光電変換パネル12を装置前面Frに向けて配置してもよい。これにより、画像表示エリアAでは、画像が表示できるとともに、画像表示エリアAを除いたエリアでは、光電変換による発電が行われる。 In this case, the image display area changing unit 210 arranges the display panel 11 of the display device 10 facing the device front surface Fr in the image display area A among the plurality of display devices 10 of the image display area variable display 200. Also good. Furthermore, in this case, the image display area changing unit 210 may arrange the photoelectric conversion panel 12 of the display device 10 toward the device front surface Fr in an area excluding the image display area. Thus, an image can be displayed in the image display area A, and power generation by photoelectric conversion is performed in the area excluding the image display area A.
 また、画像表示システム400は、受光センサ220から得られる受光情報に基づいて画像情報入力部260に送る画像信号を設定するように外部処理装置300を構成してもよい。また、外部処理装置300の画像変更設定タイマー310は、画像情報入力部260に送る画像信号を変更するタイミングが設定されていてもよい。 Further, the image display system 400 may configure the external processing device 300 so as to set an image signal to be sent to the image information input unit 260 based on light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 220. In addition, the image change setting timer 310 of the external processing apparatus 300 may be set with a timing for changing the image signal sent to the image information input unit 260.
 なお、上述した形態では、外部処理装置300によって、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に表示させる画像信号が、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の画像情報入力部260に送られる。かかる構成によらず、例えば、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の画像情報入力部260に直接、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に表示させる画像信号を入力してもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the image signal to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200 is sent to the image information input unit 260 of the image display area variable display 200 by the external processing device 300. Regardless of this configuration, for example, an image signal to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200 may be directly input to the image information input unit 260 of the image display area variable display 200.
 次に、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御方法について一例を説明する。 Next, an example of a method for controlling the image display area variable display will be described.
 ここで、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、例えば、図9に示すように、表示パネル11と、光電変換パネル12とを備えている。表示パネル11は、上述したように1つの画面を構成し得るように複数並べられている。光電変換パネル12は、複数の表示パネル11に対して、それぞれ装置前面Frに向けて延びた直線に対して直交するように設けられた回転軸dの周りに配置されている。かかる画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の制御方法は、例えば、図35に示すように、受光情報取得ステップ(S1)と、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)と、切替ステップ(S3)とを備えている。 Here, the image display area variable display 200 includes, for example, a display panel 11 and a photoelectric conversion panel 12 as shown in FIG. A plurality of display panels 11 are arranged so that one screen can be formed as described above. The photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged around a rotation axis d provided so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the device front surface Fr with respect to the plurality of display panels 11. For example, as shown in FIG. 35, the control method of the image display area variable display 200 includes a received light information acquisition step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). .
 受光情報取得ステップ(S1)は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ220によって受光情報を取得する。
 次に、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)は、受光情報取得ステップ(S1)において取得された受光情報に基づいて、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に画像を表示する画像表示エリアAを設定する。
 そして、切替ステップ(S3)は、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)で設定された画像表示エリアA内において、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態にするとともに、画像表示エリアAを除いて光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態にする。
In the light reception information acquisition step (S1), the light reception information is acquired by the light reception sensor 220 that receives external light irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr of the image display area variable display 200.
Next, in the image display area setting step (S2), the image display area A for displaying an image on the image display area variable display 200 is set based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step (S1).
In the switching step (S3), in the image display area A set in the image display area setting step (S2), the display panel 11 is placed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and the image display area A Except that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
 これにより、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光した受光センサ220の受光情報に基づいて、適切な領域に画像表示エリアAを設定することができる。 Thereby, the image display area A can be set in an appropriate area based on the light reception information of the light receiving sensor 220 that has received the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
 次に、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの他の制御方法を説明する。
 ここでは、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の基本的な構成は、同じであるので説明を省略する。この形態では、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の制御方法は、図36に示すように、画像情報入力ステップ(S1)と、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)と、切替ステップ(S3)とを備えている。
Next, another control method of the image display area variable display will be described.
Here, since the basic configuration of the image display area variable display 200 is the same, the description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the control method of the image display area variable display 200 includes an image information input step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). Yes.
 画像情報入力ステップ(S1)は、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に表示させる画像情報が入力される。
 画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)は、画像情報入力ステップ(S1)において入力された画像情報に基づいて、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200に画像を表示する画像表示エリアAを設定する。
 そして、切替ステップ(S3)は、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)で設定された画像表示エリアA内において、表示パネル11が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態にするとともに、画像表示エリアAを除いて光電変換パネル12が装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態にする。
In the image information input step (S1), image information to be displayed on the image display area variable display 200 is input.
In the image display area setting step (S2), an image display area A for displaying an image on the image display area variable display 200 is set based on the image information input in the image information input step (S1).
In the switching step (S3), in the image display area A set in the image display area setting step (S2), the display panel 11 is placed toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and the image display area A Except that the photoelectric conversion panel 12 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the apparatus.
≪表示装置10、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200の他の形態≫
 図16は、かかる他の形態に係る表示装置10Cを示している。この表示装置10Cは、図16に示すように、1つの表示パネル11と2つの光電変換パネル12a、12bが、回転軸dの周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている。
<< Other forms of display device 10 and image display area variable display 200 >>
FIG. 16 shows a display device 10C according to another embodiment. In this display device 10C, as shown in FIG. 16, one display panel 11 and two photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are arranged along the side surface of a triangular prism set around a rotation axis d.
≪表示装置10C≫
 この表示装置10Cは、上述した画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200(図9参照)の表示装置10として採用することができる。この場合、表示装置10Cは、図16に示すように、複数の表示装置10Cの表示パネル11が、1つの画面を構成し得るように並べられる。この場合、図16に示すように、表示パネル11を装置前面Frに向けることによって、表示装置10Cは装置前面Frに向けて画像を表示することができる。
<< Display device 10C >>
This display device 10C can be employed as the display device 10 of the above-described image display area variable display 200 (see FIG. 9). In this case, as shown in FIG. 16, the display devices 10C are arranged so that the display panels 11 of the plurality of display devices 10C can form one screen. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16, by directing the display panel 11 toward the device front surface Fr, the display device 10C can display an image toward the device front surface Fr.
 また、光電変換パネル12a、12bを装置前面Frに向けて配置する場合には、図17に示すように、2つの光電変換パネル12a、12bの角が装置前面Frに向けられるように、回転軸dを回転するとよい。 Further, when the photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are arranged toward the apparatus front surface Fr, as shown in FIG. 17, the rotation axis is set so that the corners of the two photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are directed toward the apparatus front surface Fr. It is good to rotate d.
 この形態では、図17に示すように、一方の光電変換パネル12aは、装置前面Frに対して斜め下方に向き、また、他方の光電変換パネル12bは、装置前面Frに対して斜め上方に向く。このように、光電変換パネル12a、12bは、全体として山と谷を繰り返す波板状に配置される。この場合、図17に示すように、太陽光は、一方の光電変換パネル12bに照射される。当該一方の光電変換パネル12bは照射された太陽光によって発電する。当該一方の光電変換パネル12bに照射された太陽光は、他方の光電変換パネル12aに向けて反射される。そして、当該他方の光電変換パネル12aでも発電される。このため、この表示装置10Cは照射された太陽光を利用して効率よく発電できる。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, one photoelectric conversion panel 12a faces obliquely downward with respect to the device front surface Fr, and the other photoelectric conversion panel 12b faces obliquely upward with respect to the device front surface Fr. . In this way, the photoelectric conversion panels 12a and 12b are arranged in a corrugated shape that repeats peaks and valleys as a whole. In this case, as shown in FIG. 17, sunlight is irradiated to one photoelectric conversion panel 12b. The one photoelectric conversion panel 12b generates power by the irradiated sunlight. The sunlight irradiated to the one photoelectric conversion panel 12b is reflected toward the other photoelectric conversion panel 12a. The other photoelectric conversion panel 12a also generates power. For this reason, this display apparatus 10C can generate electric power efficiently using the irradiated sunlight.
≪表示装置10D≫
 図18は、さらに他の形態に係る表示装置10Dを示している。この表示装置10Dは、図18に示すように、異なる2種類の表示パネル11a、11bと1つの光電変換パネル12とが、回転軸dの周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている。異なる2つの表示パネル11a、11bとしては、例えば、2D表示用の表示パネル11aと3D表示用の表示パネル11bとが挙げられる。ここで、「2D表示用の表示パネル」は、2次元映像を表示する表示パネルであり、3D表示用の表示パネルは、3次元映像を表示する表示パネルを意味する。3D表示用の表示パネル11bで表示された3次元映像を視聴するには、専用の眼鏡が必要になる場合もある。
<< Display device 10D >>
FIG. 18 shows a display device 10D according to still another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18, in this display device 10D, two different types of display panels 11a and 11b and one photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged along a side surface of a triangular prism set around a rotation axis d. Yes. Examples of the two different display panels 11a and 11b include a display panel 11a for 2D display and a display panel 11b for 3D display. Here, the “display panel for 2D display” is a display panel that displays a 2D image, and the display panel for 3D display means a display panel that displays a 3D image. In order to view a 3D image displayed on the display panel 11b for 3D display, dedicated glasses may be required.
 図18に示す表示装置10Dによれば、2次元映像を表示する場合には、2D表示用の表示パネル11aを装置前面Frに向けて配置するとよい。また、3次元映像を表示する場合には、図示は省略するが、3D表示用の表示パネル11bを装置前面Frに向けて配置するとよい。これにより、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ200は、2次元映像を表示する場合と、3次元映像を表示する場合とでパネルを切り替えることができる。 According to the display device 10D shown in FIG. 18, when displaying a two-dimensional image, the display panel 11a for 2D display may be arranged facing the front surface Fr of the device. In the case of displaying a 3D image, although not shown in the figure, the 3D display display panel 11b may be arranged facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Thereby, the image display area variable display 200 can switch a panel between the case of displaying a 2D video and the case of displaying a 3D video.
 なお、回転軸dの周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている異なる2種類の表示パネルとして、2D表示用の表示パネル11aと3D表示用の表示パネル11bとを例示したが、当該2種類の表示パネルは、これに限定されない。 In addition, although the display panel 11a for 2D display and the display panel 11b for 3D display were illustrated as two different types of display panels arranged along the side surface of the triangular prism set around the rotation axis d, The two types of display panels are not limited to this.
 以上、本発明に係る表示装置10について、表示パネル11と光電変換パネル12とが、回転軸dの周りに配置された形態を種々説明したが、本発明に係る表示装置は、かかる形態に限定されない。以下に、他の形態に係る表示装置を説明する。 The display device 10 according to the present invention has been described in various forms in which the display panel 11 and the photoelectric conversion panel 12 are arranged around the rotation axis d. However, the display device according to the present invention is limited to such a form. Not. Below, the display device which concerns on another form is demonstrated.
≪表示装置100≫
 図19から図21は、他の形態に係る表示装置100を示している。図22は、図20のXXII-XXII断面図である。
<< Display device 100 >>
19 to 21 show a display device 100 according to another embodiment. 22 is a sectional view taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.
 この表示装置100は、図19から図21に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111が装置前面(ここでは、紙面の法線方向)に向けて配置されている。切替機構113は、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なった状態(例えば、図20、図21参照)と、表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態(例えば、図19参照)とを切り替える。 In this display device 100, as shown in FIG. 19 to FIG. 21, in a predetermined region C, the display panel 111 is arranged toward the front surface of the device (in this case, the normal direction of the paper). In the predetermined region C, the switching mechanism 113 shifts from the front side of the display panel 111 when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21). The state is switched (for example, see FIG. 19).
 この形態では、表示装置100は、複数の光電変換パネル112a~112dを備えている。この表示装置100は、予め定められた領域C(表示パネル111が配置された領域C)を分割した複数の区画C1~C4が設定されている。複数の光電変換パネル112a~112dは、かかる複数の区画C1~C4にそれぞれ対応した形状を有している。また、予め定められた領域C(表示パネル111が配置された領域C)を縦横にそれぞれ半分の位置で分割した4つの区画C1~C4が設定されている。切替機構113は、複数の光電変換パネル112a~112dを移動させる。この形態では、切替機構113は、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なった状態と、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態とを、複数の区画C1~C4においてそれぞれ切り替える機構である。 In this embodiment, the display device 100 includes a plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d. In the display device 100, a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined area C (area C in which the display panel 111 is arranged) are set. The plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d have shapes respectively corresponding to the plurality of sections C1 to C4. In addition, four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined area C (area C where the display panel 111 is arranged) vertically and horizontally at half positions. The switching mechanism 113 moves the plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d. In this embodiment, the switching mechanism 113 has a plurality of states in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111. It is a mechanism for switching in each of the sections C1 to C4.
 なお、この形態では、表示装置100は、予め定められた領域C(表示パネル111が配置された領域C)を分割した複数の区画C1~C4が設定されている。複数の光電変換パネル112a~112dは、かかる複数の区画C1~C4にそれぞれ対応した形状を有している。表示装置100は、かかる形態に限定されない。また、この形態では、方形形状の予め定められた領域Cを縦横にそれぞれ半分の位置で分割した4つの区画C1~C4が設定されている。区画C1~C4の設定の仕方は、かかる形態に限定されない。 In this embodiment, the display device 100 is set with a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined area C (area C where the display panel 111 is arranged). The plurality of photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d have shapes respectively corresponding to the plurality of sections C1 to C4. The display device 100 is not limited to such a form. Further, in this embodiment, four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined rectangular area C vertically and horizontally at half positions. The method of setting the sections C1 to C4 is not limited to such a form.
 この形態では、表示装置100は、切替機構113を制御することによって画像表示エリアを変更する画像表示エリア変更部114を備えている。ここで、画像表示エリアは、表示パネル111によって画像を表示できるエリアである。この形態では、画像表示エリアは、複数の区画C1~C4のうち、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれた区画によって区画される。この形態では、画像表示エリア変更部114は、切替機構113を制御することによって、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれた区画によって構成される画像表示エリアを変更する。 In this embodiment, the display device 100 includes an image display area changing unit 114 that changes the image display area by controlling the switching mechanism 113. Here, the image display area is an area where an image can be displayed on the display panel 111. In this embodiment, the image display area is partitioned by the sections where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 among the plurality of sections C1 to C4. In this embodiment, the image display area changing unit 114 controls the switching mechanism 113 to change the image display area constituted by sections in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111.
 この形態では、表示装置100は、図19及び図22に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111が装置前面Frに向けて配置されている。また、この形態では、表示パネル111として大型の矩形の表示パネルが用いられている。また、表示パネル111は、図22に示すように、壁40に設けられた窪み40aに嵌め込まれている。また、図19~図21に示すように、表示パネル111には、縦横にそれぞれ半分の位置で分割された4つの区画C1~C4が設定されている。光電変換パネル112a~112dは、当該各区画C1~C4に概ね応じた形状と大きさで構成されている。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 22, in the display device 100, the display panel 111 is disposed toward the front surface Fr of the device in a predetermined region C. In this embodiment, a large rectangular display panel is used as the display panel 111. Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the display panel 111 is fitted in a recess 40 a provided in the wall 40. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the display panel 111 is set with four sections C1 to C4 that are divided vertically and horizontally at half positions. The photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are configured with a shape and a size approximately corresponding to each of the sections C1 to C4.
 また、この形態では、表示装置100の当該予め定められた領域Cの周りに他の光電変換パネル42が配置されている。かかる他の光電変換パネル42と壁40との間には、図22に示すように、光電変換パネル112a~112dが移動するための隙間44、46が設けられている。各光電変換パネル112a~112dは、図19から図22に示すように、表示パネル111の前面側からずれる際に当該隙間44、46に移動する。 In this embodiment, another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is disposed around the predetermined region C of the display device 100. As shown in FIG. 22, gaps 44 and 46 for moving the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are provided between the other photoelectric conversion panel 42 and the wall 40. As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, each of the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d moves to the gaps 44 and 46 when displaced from the front side of the display panel 111.
 このように、この表示装置100の切替機構113は、当該予め定められた領域Cに対して、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なった状態(図21参照)と、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態(図19参照)とを切り替える。 As described above, the switching mechanism 113 of the display device 100 is in a state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 with respect to the predetermined region C (see FIG. 21). The conversion panels 112a to 112d are switched to a state where the conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 19).
 かかる形態では、図19から図21に示すように、光電変換パネル112a~112dを表示パネル111の前面側に重ねたり、光電変換パネル112a~112dを表示パネル111の前面側からずらしたりすることによって、表示パネル111が画像を表示する範囲を変更することができる。 In such a form, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are stacked on the front side of the display panel 111, or the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are shifted from the front side of the display panel 111. The range in which the display panel 111 displays an image can be changed.
≪図19に示す態様≫
 ここで、図19に示す態様では、表示パネル111が配置された領域Cに設定された全ての区画C1~C4において、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれている。この場合、表示装置100は、領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4において画像を表示することができる。画像表示エリアは当該領域Cに設定されている。
<< Mode shown in FIG. 19 >>
Here, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 19, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 in all the sections C1 to C4 set in the area C where the display panel 111 is arranged. In this case, the display device 100 can display an image in all the sections C1 to C4 of the area C. The image display area is set in the area C.
≪図20に示す態様≫
 また、図20に示す態様では、表示パネル111が配置された領域Cのうち、区画C1、C2、C4において、光電変換パネル112a、112b、112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なっている。区画C3では、光電変換パネル112cが表示パネル111の前面側からずれている。この場合、表示装置100は、区画C3において画像を表示することができる。画像表示エリアは当該区画C3に設定されている。また、この態様では、区画C1、C2、C4では、表示パネル111の前面側に重ねられた光電変換パネル112a、112b、112dによって発電することができる。
<< Mode shown in FIG. 20 >>
In the mode illustrated in FIG. 20, the photoelectric conversion panels 112 a, 112 b, and 112 d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 in the sections C <b> 1, C <b> 2, and C <b> 4 in the region C where the display panel 111 is disposed. In the section C3, the photoelectric conversion panel 112c is displaced from the front side of the display panel 111. In this case, the display device 100 can display an image in the section C3. The image display area is set in the section C3. Further, in this aspect, in the sections C1, C2, and C4, power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a, 112b, and 112d stacked on the front side of the display panel 111.
 このように、この形態では、画像表示エリア変更部114は、図20に示すように、画像表示エリア内の区画C3において、光電変換パネル112cが表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態にする。さらに画像表示エリア変更部114は、当該画像表示エリアを除いた区画C1、C2、C4において、光電変換パネル112a、112b、112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なった状態にする。これにより、画像表示エリアを除く区画C1、C2、C4において発電することができる。 Thus, in this embodiment, the image display area changing unit 114 causes the photoelectric conversion panel 112c to be shifted from the front side of the display panel 111 in the section C3 in the image display area, as shown in FIG. Further, the image display area changing unit 114 makes the photoelectric conversion panels 112a, 112b, and 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area. As a result, power can be generated in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area.
≪図21に示す態様≫
 また、図21に示す態様では、表示パネル111が配置された領域Cのうち、全ての区画C1~C4において、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なっている。この態様では、区画C1~C4において、光電変換パネル112a~112dによって発電することができる。このように、表示装置100は、表示パネル111によって画像が表示されるエリア(画像表示エリア)を変更することができる。
<< Mode shown in FIG. 21 >>
In the mode shown in FIG. 21, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 in all the sections C1 to C4 in the region C where the display panel 111 is arranged. In this embodiment, power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d in the sections C1 to C4. As described above, the display device 100 can change the area (image display area) in which an image is displayed on the display panel 111.
≪表示装置101≫
 図23は、他の形態に係る表示装置101を示している。この表示装置101の表示パネル111は、液晶パネル120と、バックライト140と、バックライト制御部160を備えている。ここで、バックライト140は、液晶パネル120の背面を照射するとともに、液晶パネル120の背面に照射する光を部分的に消灯可能な構成を備えている。また、バックライト制御部160は、バックライト140を制御する制御装置である。
<< Display device 101 >>
FIG. 23 shows a display device 101 according to another embodiment. The display panel 111 of the display device 101 includes a liquid crystal panel 120, a backlight 140, and a backlight control unit 160. Here, the backlight 140 is configured to irradiate the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120 and to partially turn off the light applied to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120. The backlight control unit 160 is a control device that controls the backlight 140.
 この形態では、バックライト制御部160は、光電変換パネル112a~112dが液晶パネル120の前面側に部分的に重なった場合に、光電変換パネル112a~112dが液晶パネル120の前面側に重なった部分において、バックライト140を部分的に消灯する。かかるバックライト140は、例えば、光源として複数のLEDが配置されており、液晶パネル120の背面に照射する光を部分的に消灯可能に構成するとよい。 In this embodiment, the backlight control unit 160 has a portion where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the liquid crystal panel 120 when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d partially overlap the front side of the liquid crystal panel 120. The backlight 140 is partially turned off. For example, the backlight 140 may include a plurality of LEDs as a light source, and may be configured to be able to partially turn off the light applied to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120.
 また、図23に示された表示装置101では、例えば、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれている場合(図19参照)、バックライト制御部160は、全ての区画C1~C4においてバックライト140を点灯する。 Further, in the display device 101 shown in FIG. 23, for example, when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 19), the backlight control unit 160 includes all the sections C1. In ~ C4, the backlight 140 is turned on.
 これに対して、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の区画C1、C2、C4に対して、前面側に重なっている場合(図20参照)、表示パネル111は区画C3で画像を表示する。しかしながら、光電変換パネル112a~112dが前面側に重なった区画C1、C2、C4では、画像を表示しない。この場合、バックライト制御部160は、区画C1、C2、C4においてバックライト140を消灯し、区画C3のみ点灯するとよい。このように、図23に示された形態では、光電変換パネル112a~112dが液晶パネル120の前面側に重なった部分において、バックライト140を部分的に消灯するとよい。これによって、表示装置100は、消費電力を抑えて省力化を図ることができる。 In contrast, when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side with respect to the sections C1, C2, and C4 of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 20), the display panel 111 displays an image in the section C3. . However, no image is displayed in the sections C1, C2, and C4 where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side. In this case, the backlight control unit 160 may turn off the backlight 140 in the sections C1, C2, and C4 and turn on only the section C3. As described above, in the form shown in FIG. 23, the backlight 140 may be partially extinguished at the portion where the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the liquid crystal panel 120. As a result, the display device 100 can save power by reducing power consumption.
 このように、上述した表示装置100、101では、図19から図22に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111が装置前面Frに向けて配置されている。そして、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なった状態(図21参照)と、表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態(図19参照)とに切り替えられる。 As described above, in the display devices 100 and 101 described above, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the display panel 111 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the device in the predetermined region C. Then, the state is switched between the state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 21) and the state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111 (see FIG. 19).
 次に、他の形態に係る表示装置100Aを説明する。図24から図27は、それぞれ表示装置100Aを示している。 Next, a display device 100A according to another embodiment will be described. FIGS. 24 to 27 each show the display device 100A.
 この表示装置100Aは、図24から図26に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、光電変換パネル112が装置前面Frに向けて配置されている。切替機構113Aは、当該予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった状態(図26参照)と、光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた状態(図24参照)とを切り替える。 In this display device 100A, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, in a predetermined region C, the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged toward the front surface Fr of the device. In the predetermined region C, the switching mechanism 113A has a state in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see FIG. 26) and a state in which the display panel 111a to 111d deviates from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 ( (See FIG. 24).
 この形態では、表示装置100Aは、複数の表示パネル111a~111dを備えている。また、この形態では、表示装置100Aは、予め定められた領域C(光電変換パネル112が配置された領域C)を分割した複数の区画C1~C4が設定されている。この形態では、予め定められた領域C(光電変換パネル112が配置された領域C)を縦横にそれぞれ半分の位置で分割した4つの区画C1~C4が設定されている。表示パネル111a~111dは、各区画C1~C4にそれぞれ対応した形状を有している。 In this embodiment, the display device 100A includes a plurality of display panels 111a to 111d. In this embodiment, the display device 100A is set with a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined area C (area C in which the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged). In this embodiment, four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined area C (area C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is disposed) vertically and horizontally at half positions. The display panels 111a to 111d have shapes corresponding to the sections C1 to C4, respectively.
 切替機構113Aは、複数の表示パネル111a~111dを移動させる。この形態では、切替機構113Aは、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった状態と、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた状態とを、複数の区画C1~C4においてそれぞれ切り替える機構である。 The switching mechanism 113A moves the plurality of display panels 111a to 111d. In this embodiment, the switching mechanism 113A includes a plurality of states in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 and a state in which the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. It is a mechanism for switching in each of the sections C1 to C4.
 また、この形態では、表示装置100Aは、切替機構113Aを制御することによって画像表示エリアを変更する画像表示エリア変更部114Aを備えている。ここで、画像表示エリアは、表示パネル111a~111dによって画像を表示できるエリアである。この形態では、画像表示エリアは、複数の区画C1~C4のうち、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった区画によって区画される。この形態では、画像表示エリア変更部114Aは、切替機構113Aを制御することによって画像表示エリアを変更する。 In this embodiment, the display device 100A includes an image display area changing unit 114A that changes the image display area by controlling the switching mechanism 113A. Here, the image display area is an area in which an image can be displayed by the display panels 111a to 111d. In this embodiment, the image display area is partitioned by a partition in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 among the plurality of partitions C1 to C4. In this embodiment, the image display area changing unit 114A changes the image display area by controlling the switching mechanism 113A.
 この形態では、表示装置100Aは、図24及び図26に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、光電変換パネル112が装置前面Frに向けて配置されている。この形態では、大型の矩形の光電変換パネル112が用いられている。光電変換パネル112は、図27に示すように、壁40に設けられた窪み40aに嵌め込まれている。また、この形態では、図24~図26に示すように、光電変換パネル112には縦横にそれぞれ半分の位置で分割された4つの区画C1~C4が設定されている。表示パネル111a~111dは、当該各区画C1~C4に概ね応じた形状と大きさで構成されている。 In this embodiment, in the display device 100A, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr in a predetermined region C. In this embodiment, a large rectangular photoelectric conversion panel 112 is used. As shown in FIG. 27, the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is fitted in a recess 40 a provided in the wall 40. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is set with four sections C1 to C4 that are divided vertically and horizontally at half positions. The display panels 111a to 111d are configured with a shape and size generally corresponding to the sections C1 to C4.
 また、この形態では、表示装置100Aの当該予め定められた領域Cの周りに他の光電変換パネル42が配置されている。光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた表示パネル111a~111dは、他の光電変換パネル42の背面側に移動する。この形態では、かかる他の光電変換パネル42と壁40との間には、図27に示すように、表示パネル111a~111dが移動するための隙間44A、46Aが設けられている。表示パネル111a~111dは、図24及び図26に示すように、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれる際に、当該隙間44A、46Aに移動する。 In this embodiment, another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is disposed around the predetermined region C of the display device 100A. The display panels 111 a to 111 d shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42. In this embodiment, gaps 44A and 46A for moving the display panels 111a to 111d are provided between the other photoelectric conversion panel 42 and the wall 40 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 26, the display panels 111a to 111d move to the gaps 44A and 46A when the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
 この形態では、光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた表示パネル111a~111dによって、他の光電変換パネル42が遮られることがなく、他の光電変換パネル42による発電を維持することができる。これにより、この表示装置100Aでは、予め定められた領域C(図24参照)の周りの領域で安定して発電することができる。 In this embodiment, the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 are not blocked by the display panels 111a to 111d shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, and the power generation by the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 can be maintained. Thereby, in this display apparatus 100A, it is possible to stably generate power in a region around a predetermined region C (see FIG. 24).
 このように、この表示装置100Aの切替機構113Aは、当該予め定められた領域Cの各区画に対して、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった状態(図25、図26参照)と、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた状態(図24、図25参照)とを切り替える。 As described above, the switching mechanism 113A of the display device 100A is in a state in which the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in each predetermined section of the region C (FIGS. 25 and 25). 26) and a state where the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).
 かかる形態では、図24~図26に示すように、表示パネル111a~111dを光電変換パネル112の前面側に重ねたり、表示パネル111a~111dを光電変換パネル112の前面側からずらしたりすることができる。これによって、表示パネル111a~111dによって画像を表示する範囲、及び、光電変換パネル112によって発電できる範囲を変更することができる。 In such a form, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the display panels 111a to 111d may be stacked on the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, or the display panels 111a to 111d may be shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. it can. Thus, the range in which images are displayed by the display panels 111a to 111d and the range in which power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can be changed.
≪図24に示す態様≫
 ここで、図24に示す態様では、光電変換パネル112が配置された領域Cに設定された全ての区画C1~C4において、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれている。この場合、表示装置100Aは、光電変換パネル112によって領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4において発電することができる。
<< Mode shown in FIG. 24 >>
Here, in the mode shown in FIG. 24, the display panels 111a to 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in all the sections C1 to C4 set in the region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged. In this case, the display device 100A can generate power in all the sections C1 to C4 of the region C by the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
≪図25に示す態様≫
 また、図25に示す態様では、光電変換パネル112が配置された領域Cのうち、区画C3において、表示パネル111cが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なっている。他の区画C1、C2、C4では、表示パネル111a、111b、111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれている。この場合、表示装置100Aは、区画C3において画像を表示することができる。画像表示エリアは当該区画C3に設定されている。また、この態様では、区画C1、C2、C4では、光電変換パネル112の前面側から表示パネル111a、111b、111dがずれており、光電変換パネル112によって発電することができる。
<< Mode shown in FIG. 25 >>
In the mode shown in FIG. 25, the display panel 111c overlaps the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the section C3 in the region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged. In the other sections C1, C2, and C4, the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. In this case, the display device 100A can display an image in the section C3. The image display area is set in the section C3. Further, in this aspect, in the sections C1, C2, and C4, the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d are shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, and the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can generate power.
 このように、画像表示エリア変更部114Aは、図25に示すように、画像表示エリア内の区画C3において、表示パネル111cが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった状態にする。さらに画像表示エリア変更部114は、当該画像表示エリアを除いた区画C1、C2、C4において、表示パネル111a、111b、111dを光電変換パネル112の前面側からずらした状態にする。これにより画像表示エリアを除く区画C1、C2、C4において発電することができる。 As described above, the image display area changing unit 114A makes the display panel 111c overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the section C3 in the image display area as shown in FIG. Further, the image display area changing unit 114 shifts the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area. As a result, power can be generated in the sections C1, C2, and C4 excluding the image display area.
≪図26に示す態様≫
 また、図26に示す態様では、光電変換パネル112が配置された領域Cのうち、全ての区画C1~C4において、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なっている。この態様では、光電変換パネル112が配置された領域Cは、表示パネル111a~111dによって画像を表示することができる。このように、表示装置100Aは、表示パネル111a~111dによって画像が表示されるエリア(画像表示エリア)を変更することができる。
<< Mode shown in FIG. 26 >>
In the mode shown in FIG. 26, the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in all the sections C1 to C4 in the region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged. In this aspect, the area C in which the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is arranged can display images by the display panels 111a to 111d. As described above, the display device 100A can change the area (image display area) in which an image is displayed by the display panels 111a to 111d.
 また、この形態では、各表示パネル111a~111dは、図27に示すように、それぞれ液晶パネル120Aと、液晶パネル120Aの背面を照射するバックライト140Aと、バックライト140Aを制御するバックライト制御部160Aとを備えている。バックライト制御部160Aは、表示パネル111a~111dが他の光電変換パネル42の背面側に移動した際にバックライト140Aを消灯する。例えば、図25に示す態様では、区画C1~C4のうち、領域C1、C2、C4では、表示パネル111a、111b、111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれ、それぞれ領域Cの周りに配置された他の光電変換パネル42の背面側に移動している。この場合、光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれ、それぞれ領域Cの周りに配置された他の光電変換パネル42の背面側に移動した表示パネル111a、111b、111dについては、バックライト140Aを消灯するとよい。これによって、表示装置100Aは、消費電力を抑えて省力化を図ることができる。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, each of the display panels 111a to 111d includes a liquid crystal panel 120A, a backlight 140A that irradiates the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 120A, and a backlight control unit that controls the backlight 140A. 160A. The backlight control unit 160A turns off the backlight 140A when the display panels 111a to 111d move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42. For example, in the mode shown in FIG. 25, in the areas C1, C2, and C4 among the sections C1 to C4, the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d are displaced from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, and are arranged around the area C, respectively. The other photoelectric conversion panel 42 has moved to the back side. In this case, when the backlight 140A is turned off for the display panels 111a, 111b, and 111d that are shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 and moved to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 arranged around the region C, respectively. Good. As a result, the display device 100A can save power by reducing power consumption.
 以上の通り、表示装置100では、図19~図23に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111に重なった状態と、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態とが切り替えられる。さらに、他の形態である表示装置100Aでは、図24~図27に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112に重なった状態と、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた状態とが切り替えられる。 As described above, in the display device 100, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 23, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the display panel 111 in the predetermined region C, and the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d The state shifted from the front side of the display panel 111 is switched. Further, in the display device 100A of another form, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the predetermined region C, and the display panels 111a to 111a The state where 111d is shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is switched.
 この場合、図19~図23に示す形態又は図24~図27に示す形態は、何れも予め定められた領域Cを分割した複数の区画C1~C4が設定されている。そして、予め定められた領域Cを分割した複数の区画C1~C4は、それぞれ表示パネル111又は表示パネル111a~111dによって画像を表示する態様と、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電する態様とに切り替えることができる。 In this case, in the forms shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 or the forms shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, a plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing a predetermined region C are set. The plurality of sections C1 to C4 obtained by dividing the predetermined area C are respectively configured to display an image on the display panel 111 or the display panels 111a to 111d, and to generate power on the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112. It can switch to the mode to do.
≪画像表示エリア、発電エリア≫
 表示装置100、100Aでは、予め定められた領域Cのうち、表示パネル111又は表示パネル111a~111dによって画像が表示されるエリアを「画像表示エリア」という。また、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電されるエリアを「発電エリア」という。例えば、図20又は図25に示す表示装置100、100Aの態様では、区画C3が表示パネル111又は表示パネル111a~111dによって画像が表示される「画像表示エリア」であり、区画C1、C2、C4が光電変換パネル112a、112b、112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電される「発電エリア」である。
≪Image display area, power generation area≫
In the display devices 100 and 100A, an area in which an image is displayed by the display panel 111 or the display panels 111a to 111d in the predetermined region C is referred to as an “image display area”. In addition, an area where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is referred to as “power generation area”. For example, in the aspect of the display devices 100 and 100A shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 25, the section C3 is an “image display area” in which an image is displayed by the display panel 111 or the display panels 111a to 111d, and the sections C1, C2, and C4 are displayed. Is a “power generation area” where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a, 112b, 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
≪受光センサ180≫
 この場合、表示装置100、100Aは、例えば、図20又は図25に示すように、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ180を備えていてもよい。受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報は、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aに送られる。この場合、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報に基づいて画像表示エリアを変更するとよい。
<< Light receiving sensor 180 >>
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 25, the display devices 100 and 100A may include a light receiving sensor 180 that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device. The light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor 180 is sent to the image display area changing units 114 and 114A. In this case, the image display area changing units 114 and 114 </ b> A may change the image display area based on the light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor 180.
 受光センサ180は、予め定められた領域Cに対して複数の位置に設けられているとよい。予め定められた領域Cに対して複数の位置に設けられているので、予め定められた領域Cにおいて装置前面に照射される外部光を適切に検出することができる。 The light receiving sensor 180 may be provided at a plurality of positions with respect to the predetermined region C. Since it is provided at a plurality of positions with respect to the predetermined area C, it is possible to appropriately detect the external light irradiated on the front surface of the apparatus in the predetermined area C.
 例えば、図19に示す形態では、受光センサ180は、表示パネル111が配置された予め定められた領域Cの周りの複数の位置に設けられている。この形態では、図22に示すように、当該予め定められた領域Cの周りに他の光電変換パネル42が配置されている。光電変換パネル112a~112dは、表示パネル111の前面側からずれる際に、他の光電変換パネル42の背面側に移動する。この形態では、図19に示すように、受光センサ180は、当該予め定められた領域Cの周りに配置された他の光電変換パネル42に設けられている。これにより、光電変換パネル112a~112dの移動を阻害せずに、外部光を受光できる。 For example, in the form shown in FIG. 19, the light receiving sensors 180 are provided at a plurality of positions around a predetermined region C where the display panel 111 is disposed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is arranged around the predetermined region C. When the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d are displaced from the front side of the display panel 111, they move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the light receiving sensor 180 is provided in another photoelectric conversion panel 42 arranged around the predetermined region C. Thus, external light can be received without hindering the movement of the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d.
 また、例えば、図24に示す形態では、受光センサ180は、光電変換パネル112が配置された予め定められた領域Cの周りの複数の位置に設けられている。この形態では、図27に示すように、当該予め定められた領域Cの周りに他の光電変換パネル42が配置されている。表示パネル111a~111dは、光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれる際に、他の光電変換パネル42の背面側に移動する。この形態では、図24に示すように、受光センサ180は、当該予め定められた領域Cの周りに配置された他の光電変換パネル42に設けられている。これにより、表示パネル111a~111dの移動を阻害せずに、外部光を受光できる。 For example, in the form shown in FIG. 24, the light receiving sensors 180 are provided at a plurality of positions around a predetermined region C where the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is disposed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, another photoelectric conversion panel 42 is arranged around the predetermined region C. The display panels 111 a to 111 d move to the back side of the other photoelectric conversion panels 42 when they are shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the light receiving sensor 180 is provided in another photoelectric conversion panel 42 arranged around the predetermined region C. Thus, external light can be received without hindering the movement of the display panels 111a to 111d.
 画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、図19又は図24に示すように、予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた位置に対応した区画C1~C4に、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電が行われる発電エリアが設定されるように構成してもよい。これにより、表示装置100、100Aは、屋外に設置された場合に、区画C1~C4のうち太陽光が良く当っている区画において、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112で発電することができる。 As shown in FIG. 19 or FIG. 24, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A are arranged in the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d in the sections C1 to C4 corresponding to the positions where the received light information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained. Alternatively, a power generation area where power generation is performed by the photoelectric conversion panel 112 may be set. As a result, when the display devices 100 and 100A are installed outdoors, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can generate power in the section C1 to C4 where sunlight is well applied. it can.
 また、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた受光センサ180が予め定められた数よりも多くなった場合に、予め定められた領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4を発電エリアにしてもよい。この場合において、発電エリアでは、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電される。  In addition, the image display area changing units 114 and 114 </ b> A are configured to change the predetermined area C when the number of the light receiving sensors 180 from which the light receiving information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained is larger than the predetermined number. All the sections C1 to C4 may be used as power generation areas. In this case, power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 in the power generation area. *
 例えば、図19又は図24に示すように、予め定められた領域Cの周りに配置された複数の受光センサ180のうち多くの受光センサ180から予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られる場合がある。この場合、装置前面Frに、概ね太陽光が強く当っていると考えられる。このため、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、図21又は図24に示すように、予め定められた領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4を発電エリアに設定するとよい。これにより、表示装置100、100Aは、予め定められた領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4において発電できる。 For example, as shown in FIG. 19 or FIG. 24, light reception information exceeding a predetermined reference value can be obtained from many light reception sensors 180 out of a plurality of light reception sensors 180 arranged around a predetermined region C. There is a case. In this case, it is considered that the sunlight on the front surface Fr of the apparatus is generally strong. Therefore, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A may set all the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined area C as power generation areas as shown in FIG. 21 or FIG. Thereby, the display devices 100 and 100A can generate power in all the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined region C.
≪受光センサ180の配置例≫
 また、図28は、表示装置100、100A(図19及び図24参照)について、他の形態を示している。この場合、表示装置100、100Aは、図28に示すように、予め定められた領域Cの少なくとも中央部分に受光センサ180(c)が配置されている。画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、予め定められた領域Cの中央部分に配置された受光センサ180(c)から得られた受光情報が、予め定められた基準値を上回った場合に、予め定められた領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4について、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電が行われる発電エリアにする。
≪Example of arrangement of light receiving sensor 180≫
FIG. 28 shows another embodiment of the display devices 100 and 100A (see FIGS. 19 and 24). In this case, in the display devices 100 and 100A, as shown in FIG. 28, the light receiving sensor 180 (c) is arranged at least in the central portion of the predetermined region C. The image display area changing units 114 and 114A preliminarily detect when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 180 (c) disposed in the central portion of the predetermined region C exceeds a predetermined reference value. All the sections C1 to C4 of the defined region C are set as power generation areas where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112.
 表示装置100、100Aの中央部分は、表示装置100、100Aが、予め定められた領域Cの全体で画像を表示する際に、視聴者の視界に入りやすい。当該表示装置100、100Aの中央部分に強い光が当って画像が見難くなるような場合に、表示装置100、100Aに画像表示エリアを設定しても、視聴者にストレスを生じさせることがある。図28に示す形態では、予め定められた領域Cの中央部分に配置された受光センサ180(c)から得られた受光情報が、予め定められた基準値を上回った場合に、予め定められた領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4を、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電が行われる発電エリアにすることができる。この場合に、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域Cの全ての区画C1~C4について、無理に画像を表示せず、光電変換パネル112a~112d又は光電変換パネル112によって発電が行われる発電エリアにすることができる。 The central part of the display devices 100 and 100A is easy to enter the viewer's field of view when the display devices 100 and 100A display an image in the entire predetermined area C. Even if an image display area is set in the display devices 100 and 100A when strong light hits the central part of the display devices 100 and 100A and it becomes difficult to see the image, the viewer may be stressed. . In the form shown in FIG. 28, when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 180 (c) arranged in the central portion of the predetermined region C exceeds a predetermined reference value, it is predetermined. All the sections C1 to C4 of the region C can be set as a power generation area where power is generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112. In this case, power generation is performed by the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d or the photoelectric conversion panel 112 without forcibly displaying an image for all the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A. Can be an area.
 また、表示装置100、100Aは、図19、図24又は図28に示すように、受光センサ180、180(c)から得られた受光情報が予め定められた時間に継続して基準値を上回った場合に、受光情報が基準値を上回った場合の所定の処理が行われるようにしてもよい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 19, FIG. 24 or FIG. 28, the display devices 100 and 100A have the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) continuously exceeding the reference value at a predetermined time. In this case, a predetermined process may be performed when the received light information exceeds the reference value.
 例えば、表示装置100、100Aが屋外に設置された場合には、晴れた日でも雲などの影響で、表示装置100、100Aに影が生じる場合がある。このため、表示装置100、100Aの装置前面Frに照射される外部光の輝度が大きく変化する場合がある。このような場合に、表示装置100、100Aに照射される外部光が一時的に遮られる。表示装置100、100Aに照射される外部光が一時的に遮られると、受光センサ180、180(c)によって得られる受光情報が一時的に大きく変化する。この際、一時的に大きく変化した受光情報に基づいて、画像表示エリアが都度変更されると、表示装置100、100Aは、安定して画像を表示することができない。この場合は、視聴者にストレスを与えかねないし、発電効率も悪くなる。このため、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、受光センサ180、180(c)から得られた受光情報が、予め定められた時間に継続して基準値を上回った場合に、受光情報が基準値を上回った場合の所定の処理を行うように構成されている。これによって、画像表示エリアが不必要に変更されるのを防止できる。 For example, when the display devices 100 and 100A are installed outdoors, the display devices 100 and 100A may be shaded by the influence of clouds or the like even on a clear day. For this reason, the luminance of the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A may change greatly. In such a case, the external light irradiated on the display devices 100 and 100A is temporarily blocked. When the external light applied to the display devices 100 and 100A is temporarily blocked, the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) temporarily changes greatly. At this time, if the image display area is changed every time based on the light reception information that has changed greatly temporarily, the display devices 100 and 100A cannot stably display an image. In this case, the viewer may be stressed and the power generation efficiency is also deteriorated. Therefore, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A determine that the light reception information is the reference when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) continuously exceeds the reference value for a predetermined time. It is configured to perform a predetermined process when the value is exceeded. This can prevent the image display area from being changed unnecessarily.
 また、基準値は、予め定められた異なるタイミングにおいて、受光センサ180、180(c)によって得られた受光情報の差分に対して設定されていてもよい。この場合、受光センサ180、180(c)によって得られた受光情報の経時的な変化量を反映して画像表示エリアが変更される。かかる表示装置100、100Aによれば、外部光の明るさが一時的に大きく変化した場合であっても、不必要に画像表示エリアが変更されるのを防止できる。 Further, the reference value may be set with respect to the difference between the light reception information obtained by the light reception sensors 180 and 180 (c) at different predetermined timings. In this case, the image display area is changed to reflect the amount of change over time of the received light information obtained by the light receiving sensors 180 and 180 (c). According to the display devices 100 and 100A, it is possible to prevent the image display area from being unnecessarily changed even when the brightness of the external light changes temporarily.
≪受光センサ180の他の配置例≫
 また、図29~図32は、表示装置100、100A(図19及び図24参照)について、他の形態を示している。受光センサ180は、図29~図32に示すように、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域C内に複数配置してもよい。
<< Other arrangement examples of the light receiving sensor 180 >>
29 to 32 show other forms of the display devices 100 and 100A (see FIGS. 19 and 24). As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, a plurality of light receiving sensors 180 may be arranged in a predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A.
 例えば、受光センサ180は、図29に示すように、複数の区画C1~C4にそれぞれ設けられていてもよい。この場合、各区画C1~C4に対して、装置前面Frに照射された外部光を受光センサ180によって検知することができ、表示装置100、100Aに適切に画像表示エリアを設定することができる。 For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided in each of a plurality of sections C1 to C4. In this case, for each of the sections C1 to C4, the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus can be detected by the light receiving sensor 180, and an image display area can be appropriately set in the display devices 100 and 100A.
 また、受光センサ180は、例えば、図30~図32に示すように、予め定められた領域Cを横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って配置されていてもよい。例えば、図30に示すように、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域Cが略方形形状である場合、受光センサ180は、予め定められた領域Cの四辺の対向した二辺の中間点を結ぶ線L1,L2に沿って配置されていてもよい。 Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along a line set so as to cross or longitudinally cross a predetermined region C. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when the predetermined area C of the display device 100, 100 </ b> A has a substantially square shape, the light receiving sensor 180 is an intermediate point between two opposite sides of the predetermined area C. May be arranged along the lines L1 and L2 connecting the two.
 また、例えば、図31に示すように、受光センサ180は、略方形形状である予め定められた領域Cの四辺のうち対向した二辺に沿った周縁部に配置されていてもよい。なお、図31に示す例では、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域Cの四辺の対向した二辺(L3、L4)、(L5、L6)の周縁部に、それぞれ受光センサ180が配置されている。受光センサ180は、予め定められた領域Cの四辺の対向した二辺(L3、L4)、(L5、L6)のうち、何れか一方の対向した二辺の周縁部のみに配置されていてもよい。 Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged at the peripheral edge portions along two opposite sides of the four sides of the predetermined region C having a substantially square shape. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the light receiving sensors 180 are arranged on the peripheral portions of two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the predetermined region C of the display devices 100, 100A. Has been. The light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged only at the peripheral part of one of the two opposite sides (L3, L4) and (L5, L6) of the four sides of the predetermined region C. Good.
 また、例えば、図32に示すように、受光センサ180は、略方形形状である予め定められた領域Cの対角線(L7、L8)に沿って配置されていてもよい。なお、図32に示す例では、予め定められた領域Cの2つの対角線L7,L8のそれぞれに沿って受光センサ180が配置されているが、予め定められた領域Cの2つの対角線L7,L8のうち、何れか一方のみに沿って受光センサ180が配置されていてもよい。 Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 32, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along diagonal lines (L7, L8) of a predetermined region C having a substantially square shape. In the example shown in FIG. 32, the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed along each of the two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of the predetermined area C. However, the two diagonal lines L7 and L8 of the predetermined area C are provided. Among these, the light receiving sensor 180 may be arranged along only one of them.
 なお、この場合、図19に示す表示装置100においては、当該予め定められた領域Cの各区画C1~C4に、光電変換パネル112a~112dが移動する。また、図24に示す表示装置100Aでは、当該予め定められた領域Cの各区画C1~C4に、表示パネル111a~111dが移動する。このため、図29~図32に示すように、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域C内に、受光センサ180が配置される場合には、光電変換パネル112a~112dや表示パネル111a~111dが移動しても、受光センサ180によって所要の受光情報が得られるように構成するとよい。 In this case, in the display device 100 shown in FIG. 19, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d move to the respective sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined region C. In the display device 100A shown in FIG. 24, the display panels 111a to 111d move to the sections C1 to C4 of the predetermined area C. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, when the light receiving sensor 180 is disposed in the predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A, the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d and the display panels 111a to 111a Even if 111d moves, it is good to comprise so that required light reception information may be obtained by the light reception sensor 180. FIG.
 例えば、図19に示す表示装置100においては、表示パネル111と光電変換パネル112a~112dの両方の所定位置に受光センサ180を設けておくとよい。また、図24に示す表示装置100Aにおいては、表示パネル111a~111dと、光電変換パネル112の両方の所定位置に受光センサ180を設けておくとよい。このように、表示装置100、100Aにおいて、表示パネル(111、111a~111d)と光電変換パネル(112a~112d、112)の両方に設けるとよい。これにより、光電変換パネル112a~112dや表示パネル111a~111dが移動しても、受光センサ180によって表示装置100、100Aの所定位置で所要の受光情報が得られる。 For example, in the display device 100 shown in FIG. 19, the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided at predetermined positions on both the display panel 111 and the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d. In the display device 100A shown in FIG. 24, the light receiving sensor 180 may be provided at predetermined positions on both the display panels 111a to 111d and the photoelectric conversion panel 112. As described above, in the display devices 100 and 100A, it is preferable to be provided in both the display panels (111, 111a to 111d) and the photoelectric conversion panels (112a to 112d, 112). Thus, even if the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d and the display panels 111a to 111d move, required light reception information can be obtained at predetermined positions of the display devices 100 and 100A by the light reception sensor 180.
 上述したように、受光センサ180が、予め定められた領域Cに対して複数の位置に設けられている場合において、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、複数の受光センサ180のうち予め定められた基準となる受光センサを定めてもよい。この場合、当該基準となる受光センサによって得られた受光情報と、その他の受光センサによって得られた受光情報との差分を求め、当該差分に基づいて画像表示エリアを設定してもよい。これにより、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、表示装置100、100Aの装置前面Frに照射される外部光の輝度分布を正確に反映して、適切に画像表示エリアを設定できる。 As described above, when the light receiving sensor 180 is provided at a plurality of positions with respect to the predetermined region C, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A are predetermined among the plurality of light receiving sensors 180. A light receiving sensor as a reference may be determined. In this case, a difference between the light reception information obtained by the reference light reception sensor and the light reception information obtained by other light reception sensors may be obtained, and the image display area may be set based on the difference. Thereby, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A can accurately set the image display area by accurately reflecting the luminance distribution of the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A.
≪画像表示エリア変更タイマー185≫
 また、図33は、図19に示す表示装置100及び図24に示す表示装置100Aの他の形態を示している。表示装置100、100Aは、図33に示すように、画像表示エリアを変更する時間が設定された画像表示エリア変更タイマー185を備えていてもよい。この場合、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、画像表示エリア変更タイマー185に基づいて、予め定められた時間帯において、予め定められた画像表示エリアが設定されるように構成してもよい。
<< Image display area change timer 185 >>
FIG. 33 shows another form of the display device 100 shown in FIG. 19 and the display device 100A shown in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 33, the display devices 100 and 100A may include an image display area change timer 185 in which a time for changing the image display area is set. In this case, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A may be configured to set a predetermined image display area in a predetermined time zone based on the image display area change timer 185.
 例えば、画像表示エリア変更タイマー185に設定された第1の時間帯では、図19及び図26に示すように、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域Cの全体に、画像表示エリアを設定する。また、他の時間帯では、図20及び図25に示すように、表示装置100、100Aの区画C3に、画像表示エリアを設定する。また、他の時間帯では、図21及び図24に示すように、表示装置100、100Aの予め定められた領域Cの全体に、発電エリアを設定する。この場合、例えば、表示装置100、100Aに太陽光が良く当たる時間帯や、表示装置100、100Aが設置された場所などにおいて、適当な大きさかつ適当な位置に画像表示エリアや発電エリアが設定されるように構成するとよい。 For example, in the first time zone set in the image display area change timer 185, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 26, the image display area is set in the entire predetermined area C of the display devices 100 and 100A. To do. In other time zones, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 25, an image display area is set in the section C3 of the display devices 100 and 100A. Further, in other time zones, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 24, the power generation area is set in the entire predetermined region C of the display devices 100 and 100A. In this case, for example, the image display area and the power generation area are set to an appropriate size and an appropriate position in a time zone when the display devices 100 and 100A are well exposed to sunlight, or in places where the display devices 100 and 100A are installed. It is good to constitute as described.
 ≪画像制御部190≫
 また、表示装置100、100Aは、図33に示すように、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aによって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、画像表示エリアに表示させる画像を変更する画像制御部190を備えていてもよい。
<< Image control unit 190 >>
Further, as illustrated in FIG. 33, the display devices 100 and 100A include an image control unit 190 that changes an image displayed in the image display area in accordance with the image display area changed by the image display area changing unit 114 and 114A. You may have.
 例えば、図19又は図26に示すように、表示装置100、100Aが、予め定められた領域Cの全体で1つの画像を表示する場合と、図20又は図25に示すように、表示装置100、100Aが、予め定められた領域Cのうち、一部の区画C3で1つの画像を表示する場合とでは、画像の大きさを変える必要がある。この場合、画像制御部190は、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aによって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、表示させる画像の大きさを変更する機能を備えているとよい。これにより、画像表示エリアのサイズが変更された場合でも、適切に画像を表示することができる。また、画像制御部190は、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aによって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、画像表示エリアに表示させる画像の大きさを変更してもよい。 For example, as shown in FIG. 19 or FIG. 26, the display devices 100 and 100A display one image in the entire predetermined region C, and as shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. , 100A needs to change the size of the image when displaying one image in a part of the section C3 in the predetermined region C. In this case, the image control unit 190 may have a function of changing the size of an image to be displayed according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A. Thereby, even when the size of the image display area is changed, the image can be appropriately displayed. Further, the image control unit 190 may change the size of the image displayed in the image display area according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A.
 また、表示装置100、100Aは、表示装置100、100Aの一部に表示される部分表示用画像を含んだ複数の画像を記憶した画像記憶部192を備えていてもよい。この場合、画像制御部190は、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aによって変更された画像表示エリアに基づいて、画像記憶部192に記憶された複数の画像から画像表示エリアに表示させるのに適当な画像を画像表示エリアに表示することができる。 Further, the display devices 100 and 100A may include an image storage unit 192 that stores a plurality of images including partial display images displayed on a part of the display devices 100 and 100A. In this case, the image control unit 190 is suitable for displaying in the image display area from a plurality of images stored in the image storage unit 192 based on the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A. Images can be displayed in the image display area.
≪画像表示システム450、外部処理装置350≫
 また、図33に示すように、表示装置100、100Aと相互に通信可能な外部処理装置350を備えた画像表示システム450を構成してもよい。この場合、外部処理装置350は、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aによって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、当該画像表示エリアに表示する画像信号を画像制御部190に送る。
<< Image display system 450, external processing apparatus 350 >>
33, an image display system 450 including an external processing device 350 that can communicate with the display devices 100 and 100A may be configured. In this case, the external processing device 350 sends an image signal to be displayed in the image display area to the image control unit 190 according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing units 114 and 114A.
 表示装置100、100Aは、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ180を備えていてもよい(例えば、図28~図32参照)。この場合、外部処理装置350は、表示装置100、100Aの受光センサ180から得られる受光情報に基づいて画像表示エリアに表示する画像信号を設定するように構成することができる。これにより、外部処理装置350を介し、いわゆるデジタルサイネージにおける画像表示エリアの変更や、画像の変更を行うことができる。外部処理装置350は、例えば、インターネットのような相互に通信可能な通信ネットワークを通じて、表示装置100、100Aから情報を取得し、かつ、表示装置100、100Aを制御できるように構成するとよい。 The display devices 100 and 100A may include a light receiving sensor 180 that receives external light applied to the front surface Fr of the device (see, for example, FIGS. 28 to 32). In this case, the external processing device 350 can be configured to set an image signal to be displayed in the image display area based on light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor 180 of the display devices 100 and 100A. Thereby, it is possible to change the image display area and the image in so-called digital signage via the external processing device 350. The external processing device 350 may be configured to acquire information from the display devices 100 and 100A and to control the display devices 100 and 100A through a communication network such as the Internet that can communicate with each other.
≪画像変更設定タイマー360≫
 この形態では、外部処理装置350は、画像表示エリアに表示する画像信号を変更するタイミングが設定された画像変更設定タイマー360と、画像記憶部370を備えている。画像記憶部370は、種々の画像を記憶している。この場合、外部処理装置350は、画像変更設定タイマー360に設定された所定のタイミングで、画像表示エリアAを変更できる。また、この形態では、表示装置100、100Aに表示する画像は、例えば、外部処理装置350の画像記憶部370に記憶された画像を用いることができる。
<< Image change setting timer 360 >>
In this embodiment, the external processing device 350 includes an image change setting timer 360 in which a timing for changing an image signal displayed in the image display area is set, and an image storage unit 370. The image storage unit 370 stores various images. In this case, the external processing device 350 can change the image display area A at a predetermined timing set in the image change setting timer 360. In this embodiment, for example, an image stored in the image storage unit 370 of the external processing device 350 can be used as the image displayed on the display devices 100 and 100A.
≪画像情報入力部186≫
 表示装置100、100Aは、図33に示すように、予め定められた領域Cに表示する画像情報が入力される画像情報入力部186を備えていてもよい。この場合、画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、画像情報入力部186に入力された画像情報に基づいて、予め定められた領域に画像を表示する画像表示エリアを設定することができる。
<< Image Information Input Unit 186 >>
As illustrated in FIG. 33, the display devices 100 and 100A may include an image information input unit 186 that inputs image information to be displayed in a predetermined region C. In this case, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A can set an image display area for displaying an image in a predetermined area based on the image information input to the image information input unit 186.
 また、この形態では、画像情報入力部186には、例えば、外部処理装置350から画像情報が入力される。画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、画像情報入力部186に入力された画像情報に基づいて、複数の区画C1~C4によって構成される予め定められた領域Cに、画像を表示する画像表示エリアを設定する。このように、表示装置100、100Aは、受光センサ180(図28~図32参照)や画像表示エリア変更タイマー185(図33参照)などによらず、画像情報入力部186に入力された画像情報に基づいて、画像表示エリアが設定されるように構成することができる。 In this embodiment, image information is input to the image information input unit 186 from, for example, the external processing device 350. The image display area changing units 114 and 114A display an image in a predetermined area C composed of a plurality of sections C1 to C4 based on the image information input to the image information input unit 186. Set. As described above, the display devices 100 and 100A have the image information input to the image information input unit 186 regardless of the light receiving sensor 180 (see FIGS. 28 to 32), the image display area change timer 185 (see FIG. 33), or the like. The image display area can be configured based on the above.
 また、表示装置100、100Aの画像情報入力部186には、図33に示すように、外部処理装置350によって、表示装置100、100Aに表示させる画像信号が入力されるように構成してもよい。この場合、外部処理装置350は、表示装置100、100Aの装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ180(図28~図32参照)から得られる受光情報に基づいて画像情報入力部186に送る画像信号を設定するようにしてもよい。これにより、外部処理装置350は、表示装置100、100Aの装置前面Frに照射される外部光に応じて適当な画像を表示装置100、100Aに表示させることができる。また、この場合、外部処理装置350の画像変更設定タイマー360によって、画像情報入力部186に送る画像信号を変更するタイミングが設定されていてもよい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the image information input unit 186 of the display devices 100 and 100A may be configured to receive an image signal to be displayed on the display devices 100 and 100A by the external processing device 350. . In this case, the external processing device 350 has an image information input unit based on the received light information obtained from the light receiving sensor 180 (see FIGS. 28 to 32) that receives the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A. An image signal to be sent to 186 may be set. Thereby, the external processing device 350 can display an appropriate image on the display devices 100 and 100A according to the external light irradiated on the device front surface Fr of the display devices 100 and 100A. In this case, the timing for changing the image signal to be sent to the image information input unit 186 may be set by the image change setting timer 360 of the external processing device 350.
≪表示装置100Aの他の形態≫
 なお、上述した形態では、方形形状の予め定められた領域Cを縦横にそれぞれ半分の位置で分割した4つの区画C1~C4が設定されている。区画C1~C4の設定の仕方は、かかる形態に限定されない。また、予め定められた領域Cには、区画が設定されていなくてもよい。例えば、図34に示すように、表示装置100Aは、予め定められた領域Cと概ね同じ形状の表示パネル111が、予め定められた領域Cに装置前面Frに向けて配置された光電変換パネル112の前面側において、光電変換パネル112に重なった状態と、光電変換パネル112からずれた状態(図24参照)とで任意の位置に移動するように構成してもよい。この場合、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111が光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった部分Ca(画像表示エリア)では、表示パネル111によって画像を表示することができる。また、光電変換パネル112の前面側から表示パネル111がずれた部分Cb(発電エリア)では、光電変換パネル112によって発電できる。また、光電変換パネル112に対して表示パネル111を移動させることによって、予め定められた領域Cの任意の位置に画像表示エリアを設定することができる。
<< Other forms of display device 100A >>
In the above-described embodiment, four sections C1 to C4 are set by dividing a predetermined rectangular area C vertically and horizontally at half positions. The method of setting the sections C1 to C4 is not limited to such a form. Further, no section may be set in the predetermined region C. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, in the display device 100A, a photoelectric conversion panel 112 in which a display panel 111 having substantially the same shape as the predetermined region C is arranged in the predetermined region C toward the device front surface Fr. On the front surface side, a configuration may be adopted in which it moves to an arbitrary position in a state of being overlapped with the photoelectric conversion panel 112 and a state of being shifted from the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see FIG. 24). In this case, in the predetermined area C, an image can be displayed by the display panel 111 in a portion Ca (image display area) where the display panel 111 overlaps the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. Further, in the portion Cb (power generation area) where the display panel 111 is shifted from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112, the photoelectric conversion panel 112 can generate power. In addition, by moving the display panel 111 with respect to the photoelectric conversion panel 112, an image display area can be set at an arbitrary position in a predetermined region C.
 以上、表示装置100及び100Aの種々の形態を説明した。上述したが、表示装置100、100Aは、図33に示すように、画像を表示させる表示パネル111、111a~111d;受光した光を電力に変換する光電変換パネル112、112a~112d;及び、切替機構113、113A;を備えている(図19~図21、及び、図24~図26参照)。 In the above, various forms of the display devices 100 and 100A have been described. As described above, as shown in FIG. 33, the display devices 100 and 100A include display panels 111 and 111a to 111d that display images; photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d that convert received light into electric power; Mechanisms 113 and 113A (see FIGS. 19 to 21 and FIGS. 24 to 26).
 ここで、表示パネル111、111a~111dと光電変換パネル112、112a~112dのうち何れか一方のパネルが、装置前面Frの予め定められた領域において装置前面Frに向けて配置されているとよい。また、切替機構113、113Aは、表示パネル111、111a~111dと光電変換パネル112、112a~112dのうち他方のパネルを、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、一方のパネルの前面側に重なった状態と、一方のパネルの前面側からずれた状態とを切り替える。これによって、切替機構113、113Aは、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111、111a~111dによって画像を表示できる状態と、光電変換パネル112、112a~112dによって発電できる状態とを切り替える。これにより、表示装置100、100Aは、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、画像表示エリアAを変更することができる。 Here, any one of the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d may be disposed toward the device front surface Fr in a predetermined region of the device front surface Fr. . In addition, the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A are in a state where the other of the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d overlaps the front side of one panel in a predetermined region C. And a state shifted from the front side of one panel. Accordingly, the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A switch between a state in which an image can be displayed by the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d and a state in which power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d in the predetermined region C. Accordingly, the display devices 100 and 100A can change the image display area A in the predetermined region C.
 また、ある好適な実施形態において、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、画像表示エリアAを除く部分に、発電エリアを設定することもできる。これにより、例えば、人通りの多い時間帯などでは、表示パネル111、111a~111dを装置前面Frに向けることによって、インフォメーションディスプレイとして機能させることができる。また、装置前面Frに太陽光が照射されるために画面が見難くなる時間帯では、光電変換パネル112、112a~112dが装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態に切り替えることによって発電することができる。発電された電力は、例えば、蓄電池に蓄え、インフォメーションディスプレイを機能させる場合の電力として利用することが可能である。 In a preferred embodiment, a power generation area can be set in a predetermined area C excluding the image display area A. Thus, for example, in a busy time zone, the display panels 111, 111a to 111d can be made to function as an information display by facing the front surface Fr of the apparatus. Further, in a time zone in which the screen is difficult to see because the sunlight is irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device, power can be generated by switching to the state where the photoelectric conversion panels 112, 112a to 112d are arranged toward the front surface Fr of the device. it can. The generated power can be stored, for example, in a storage battery and used as power when the information display functions.
 この場合、切替機構113、113Aを制御する切替制御部としての画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aを備えていてもよい。ここで、切替制御部114、114Aは、例えば、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ180(図19及び図24参照)を設けるとともに、受光センサ180によって得られた受光情報に基づいて切替機構113、113Aを制御するように構成することができる。これにより、装置前面Frに照射される外部光(例えば、太陽光)の強さなどを考慮した制御が行える。かかる制御では、例えば、受光センサ180によって受光情報を取得する受光情報取得ステップ;及び、受光情報取得ステップで取得された受光情報に基づいて切替機構を操作し、予め定められた領域において、表示パネル111、111a~111dによって画像を表示できる状態と、光電変換パネル112、112a~112dによって発電できる状態とを切り替える切替ステップ;を備えているとよい。 In this case, image display area changing units 114 and 114A as switching control units for controlling the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A may be provided. Here, the switching control units 114 and 114A, for example, are provided with a light receiving sensor 180 (see FIGS. 19 and 24) that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the apparatus, and in the light receiving information obtained by the light receiving sensor 180. Based on this, the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A can be controlled. Thereby, it is possible to perform control in consideration of the intensity of external light (for example, sunlight) irradiated on the apparatus front surface Fr. In such control, for example, a light reception information acquisition step of acquiring light reception information by the light reception sensor 180; and a switching mechanism is operated based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step, and a display panel is displayed in a predetermined region. A switching step of switching between a state in which an image can be displayed by 111 and 111a to 111d and a state in which power can be generated by the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d.
 また、表示パネル111、111a~111dが装置前面Frに向けて配置された状態と、光電変換パネル112、112a~112dが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替えるタイミングが設定されたタイマー(画像表示エリア変更タイマー185)を備えていてもよい。この場合、切替制御部としての画像表示エリア変更部114、114Aは、タイマー(画像表示エリア変更タイマー185)に基づいて切替機構を制御するように構成してもよい。これにより、装置前面Frに太陽光が照射されて見難くなる時間帯や、人通りが多くインフォメーションディスプレイとして利用する時間帯などを予め設定することによって、表示装置100、100Aは、適当な時間帯に適当な態様で利用することができる。 In addition, a timer (in which a timing for switching between a state in which the display panels 111 and 111a to 111d are arranged toward the front surface Fr and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d are arranged toward the front surface of the apparatus is set ( An image display area change timer 185) may be provided. In this case, the image display area changing units 114 and 114A as switching control units may be configured to control the switching mechanism based on a timer (image display area changing timer 185). Accordingly, the display devices 100 and 100A can be set in an appropriate time zone by setting in advance a time zone in which sunlight is irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device and it is difficult to see or a time zone in which there is a lot of traffic and is used as an information display. Can be used in an appropriate manner.
 次に、表示装置100及び100Aの制御方法について一例を説明する。 Next, an example of the control method of the display devices 100 and 100A will be described.
 ここで、表示装置100は、例えば、図19に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111が装置前面Frに向けて配置されている。切替機構113は、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、光電変換パネル112a~112dが表示パネル111の前面側に重なった状態(例えば、図20、図21参照)と、表示パネル111の前面側からずれた状態(例えば、図19参照)とを切り替える。表示装置100Aは、例えば、図24に示すように、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、光電変換パネル112が装置前面Frに向けて配置されている。切替機構113Aは、予め定められた領域Cにおいて、表示パネル111a~111dが光電変換パネル112の前面側に重なった状態(例えば、図25、図26参照)と、光電変換パネル112の前面側からずれた状態(例えば、図24、図25参照)とを切り替える。 Here, in the display device 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 19, in a predetermined region C, the display panel 111 is arranged toward the device front surface Fr. In the predetermined region C, the switching mechanism 113 shifts from the front side of the display panel 111 when the photoelectric conversion panels 112a to 112d overlap the front side of the display panel 111 (see, for example, FIGS. 20 and 21). The state is switched (for example, see FIG. 19). In the display device 100A, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 24, in a predetermined region C, the photoelectric conversion panel 112 is disposed toward the device front surface Fr. In the predetermined region C, the switching mechanism 113A is in a state where the display panels 111a to 111d overlap the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112 (see, for example, FIGS. 25 and 26) and from the front side of the photoelectric conversion panel 112. The state of deviation (for example, see FIGS. 24 and 25) is switched.
≪表示装置100、100Aの制御方法≫
 この場合、かかる表示装置100、100Aの制御方法は、例えば、図35に示すように、受光情報取得ステップ(S1)と、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)と、切替ステップ(S3)とを備えている。
<< Control Method of Display Devices 100 and 100A >>
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the control method of the display devices 100 and 100A includes a received light information acquisition step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). ing.
 受光情報取得ステップ(S1)は、表示装置100、100Aの装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ180(図28~図32参照)によって受光情報を取得する。
 次に、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)は、受光情報取得ステップ(S1)において取得された受光情報に基づいて、表示装置100、100Aに画像を表示する画像表示エリア(発電エリア)を設定する。
 そして、切替ステップ(S3)は、切替機構113、113Aを操作し、複数の区画C1~C4のうち画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)で設定された画像表示エリア内の区画において、表示パネル111、111a~111dによって画像を表示できる状態にするとともに、画像表示エリアを除く区画において光電変換パネル112、112a~112dによって発電できる状態にする。
In the light reception information acquisition step (S1), the light reception information is acquired by the light reception sensor 180 (see FIGS. 28 to 32) that receives external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the display device 100 or 100A.
Next, the image display area setting step (S2) sets an image display area (power generation area) for displaying an image on the display devices 100 and 100A based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step (S1). .
In the switching step (S3), the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A are operated, and the display panel 111, in the sections within the image display area set in the image display area setting step (S2) among the plurality of sections C1 to C4. 111a to 111d are in a state where images can be displayed, and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d are in a state where power can be generated in sections other than the image display area.
 この制御によれば、装置前面Frに照射される外部光を受光した受光センサ180の受光情報に基づいて、表示装置100、100Aに適当な画像表示エリア(発電エリア)を設定することができる。 According to this control, an appropriate image display area (power generation area) can be set in the display devices 100 and 100A based on the light reception information of the light receiving sensor 180 that has received the external light irradiated on the front surface Fr of the device.
≪表示装置100、100Aの他の制御方法≫
 次に、表示装置100、100Aの他の制御方法を説明する。
 この形態では、表示装置100、100Aの基本的な構成は同じであるので、ここでは説明を省略する。この形態では、表示装置100、100Aの制御方法は、図36に示すように、画像情報入力ステップ(S1)と、画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)と、切替ステップ(S3)とを備えている。
<< Other Control Methods of Display Devices 100 and 100A >>
Next, another control method of the display devices 100 and 100A will be described.
In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the display devices 100 and 100A are the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the control method of the display devices 100 and 100A includes an image information input step (S1), an image display area setting step (S2), and a switching step (S3). .
 画像情報入力ステップ(S1)は、表示装置100、100Aに表示させる画像情報が入力される。
 画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)は、画像情報入力ステップ(S1)において入力された画像情報に基づいて、表示装置100、100Aに画像を表示する画像表示エリアを複数の区画C1~C4に沿って設定する。
 そして、切替ステップ(S3)は、切替機構113、113Aを操作し、複数の区画C1~C4のうち画像表示エリア設定ステップ(S2)で設定された画像表示エリア内の区画において、表示パネル111、111a~111dによって画像を表示できる状態にするとともに、画像表示エリアを除く区画において光電変換パネル112、112a~112dによって発電できる状態にする。
In the image information input step (S1), image information to be displayed on the display devices 100 and 100A is input.
In the image display area setting step (S2), based on the image information input in the image information input step (S1), an image display area for displaying an image on the display devices 100 and 100A is set along a plurality of sections C1 to C4. Set.
In the switching step (S3), the switching mechanisms 113 and 113A are operated, and the display panel 111, in the sections within the image display area set in the image display area setting step (S2) among the plurality of sections C1 to C4. 111a to 111d are in a state where images can be displayed, and the photoelectric conversion panels 112 and 112a to 112d are in a state where power can be generated in sections other than the image display area.
 この制御によれば、表示装置100、100Aに入力された画像情報に基づいて、表示装置100、100Aに適当な画像表示エリア(発電エリア)を設定することができる。 According to this control, an appropriate image display area (power generation area) can be set in the display devices 100 and 100A based on the image information input to the display devices 100 and 100A.
 以上、表示装置、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ及び画像表示システムについて種々の形態を説明したが、本発明は上述した形態に限定されない。 As mentioned above, although various forms were demonstrated about the display apparatus, the image display area variable display, and the image display system, this invention is not limited to the form mentioned above.
 例えば、表示装置の具体的構成は上記に限定されない。また、上述した種々の形態において、表示パネル、光電変換パネル、集光レンズ、液晶表示装置などは、例えば、種々の公知技術を採用することができる。これらの具体的な構成は上記に限定されない。また、上述した各制御は、予め設定されたプログラムや制御回路に基づいて実行されるように構成できる。また、各制御は、CPUなどの演算部と、不揮発性メモリなどの記憶部を備えたコンピュータによって具現化することができる。 For example, the specific configuration of the display device is not limited to the above. In the above-described various forms, for example, various known techniques can be employed for the display panel, the photoelectric conversion panel, the condenser lens, the liquid crystal display device, and the like. These specific configurations are not limited to the above. Moreover, each control mentioned above can be comprised so that it may be performed based on the preset program and control circuit. Each control can be realized by a computer including a calculation unit such as a CPU and a storage unit such as a nonvolatile memory.
10、10A、10B、10C、10D 表示装置
11、11a、11b 表示パネル
11a1 表示面
12、12a、12b 光電変換パネル
12a1 受光面
13 切替機構
13a 切替制御部
13a1 受光センサ
13a2 タイマー
16 集光レンズ
20 略三角柱の枠体
21 支持プレート
40 壁
40a 窪み
42 他の光電変換パネル
44、44A、46、46A 隙間
100、101、100A 表示装置
111、111a~111d 表示パネル
112、112a~112d 光電変換パネル
113、113A 切替機構
114、114A 画像表示エリア変更部
120、120A 液晶パネル
140、140A バックライト
160、160A バックライト制御部
180 受光センサ
185 画像表示エリア変更タイマー
186 画像情報入力部
190 画像制御部
192 画像記憶部
200 画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ
201 フレーム
210 画像表示エリア変更部
220 受光センサ
230 画像表示エリア変更タイマー
240 画像制御部
250 画像記憶部
260 画像情報入力部
300、350 外部処理装置
310、360 画像変更設定タイマー
320、370 画像記憶部
400、450 画像表示システム
A 画像表示エリア
C 予め定められた領域
C1-C4 予め定められた領域に設定された区画
d 回転軸
Fr 装置前面
10, 10A, 10B, 10C, 10D Display device 11, 11a, 11b Display panel 11a1 Display surface 12, 12a, 12b Photoelectric conversion panel 12a1 Light receiving surface 13 Switching mechanism 13a Switching control unit 13a1 Light receiving sensor 13a2 Timer 16 Condensing lens 20 Abbreviation Triangular prism frame 21 Support plate 40 Wall 40a Depression 42 Other photoelectric conversion panels 44, 44A, 46, 46A Gaps 100, 101, 100A Display devices 111, 111a- 111d Display panels 112, 112a-112d Photoelectric conversion panels 113, 113A Switching mechanism 114, 114A Image display area change unit 120, 120A Liquid crystal panel 140, 140A Backlight 160, 160A Backlight control unit 180 Light receiving sensor 185 Image display area change timer 186 Image information input unit 190 Image Control unit 192 Image storage unit 200 Image display area variable display 201 Frame 210 Image display area change unit 220 Light receiving sensor 230 Image display area change timer 240 Image control unit 250 Image storage unit 260 Image information input unit 300, 350 External processing device 310, 360 Image change setting timer 320, 370 Image storage unit 400, 450 Image display system A Image display area C Predetermined area C1-C4 Section d set in predetermined area d Rotation axis
Fr front

Claims (40)

  1.  画像を表示させる表示パネル;
     受光した光を電力に変換する光電変換パネル;及び、
     装置前面の予め定められた領域において、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替える切替機構;を備えた表示装置。
    Display panel for displaying images;
    A photoelectric conversion panel that converts received light into electric power; and
    A switching mechanism that switches between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus in a predetermined region on the front of the apparatus; .
  2.  前記装置前面に照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ;及び、
     前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて前記切替機構を制御する切替制御部;を備えた請求項1に記載された表示装置。
    A light receiving sensor for receiving external light irradiated on the front surface of the apparatus; and
    The display device according to claim 1, further comprising: a switching control unit that controls the switching mechanism based on light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor.
  3.  前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替えるタイミングが設定されたタイマー;及び、
     前記タイマーに基づいて前記切替機構を制御する切替制御部;を備えた請求項1に記載された表示装置。
    A timer in which a timing for switching between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus is set; and
    The display device according to claim 1, further comprising: a switching control unit that controls the switching mechanism based on the timer.
  4.  前記表示パネルと前記光電変換パネルとは、前記装置前面に向けて延びた直線に対して直交するように設けられた回転軸の周りに配置されており、
     前記切替機構は、前記回転軸を回転させることによって、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替える、請求項1に記載された表示装置。
    The display panel and the photoelectric conversion panel are arranged around a rotation axis provided so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the front of the device,
    The switching mechanism switches between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus by rotating the rotation shaft. The display device described in 1.
  5.  前記表示パネルの表示面と前記光電変換パネルの受光面とがそれぞれ外側を向くように、前記表示パネルと光電変換パネルとが重ねられている、請求項4に記載された表示装置。 The display device according to claim 4, wherein the display panel and the photoelectric conversion panel are overlapped so that a display surface of the display panel and a light receiving surface of the photoelectric conversion panel face each other.
  6.  前記表示パネルと前記光電変換パネルとは、前記回転軸の周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている、請求項4に記載された表示装置。 The display device according to claim 4, wherein the display panel and the photoelectric conversion panel are arranged along a side surface of a triangular prism set around the rotation axis.
  7.  前記回転軸の周りに、前記表示パネルと、前記光電変換パネルと、前記光電変換パネルに向けて光を集める集光レンズとが配置されており、
     前記切替機構は、前記回転軸を回転させて、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記集光レンズが装置前面に向けて配置され、前記集光レンズを通じて光電変換パネルに光が集められる状態とを切り替える、請求項4に記載された表示装置。
    Around the rotation axis, the display panel, the photoelectric conversion panel, and a condenser lens that collects light toward the photoelectric conversion panel are disposed,
    The switching mechanism rotates the rotating shaft so that the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus, and the condenser lens is disposed toward the front of the apparatus, and the photoelectric conversion panel passes through the condenser lens. The display device according to claim 4, wherein the display device switches between a state in which light is collected.
  8.  前記表示パネルは、前記回転軸の周りに設定された三角柱の少なくとも1つの側面に沿って配置されており、
     前記三角柱の他の側面に沿って集光レンズが配置され、前記集光レンズに対向する前記三角柱の内側の角部に前記光電変換パネルが配置されており、
     前記切替機構は、
       前記回転軸を回転させて、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、
       前記集光レンズが装置前面に向けて配置され、前記装置前面側から前記集光レンズに入射した光が、前記集光レンズを通じて光電変換パネルに集められる状態とを切り替える、請求項4に記載された表示装置。
    The display panel is disposed along at least one side surface of a triangular prism set around the rotation axis,
    A condenser lens is disposed along the other side surface of the triangular prism, and the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed at an inner corner of the triangular prism facing the condenser lens,
    The switching mechanism is
    A state in which the display panel is arranged toward the front of the apparatus by rotating the rotation shaft;
    5. The condenser lens according to claim 4, wherein the condenser lens is disposed toward a front surface of the apparatus, and a state in which light incident on the condenser lens from the front side of the apparatus is collected on a photoelectric conversion panel through the condenser lens. Display device.
  9.  1つの表示パネルと2つの光電変換パネルが、前記回転軸の周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている、請求項4に記載された表示装置。 The display device according to claim 4, wherein one display panel and two photoelectric conversion panels are disposed along a side surface of a triangular prism set around the rotation axis.
  10.  異なる2種類の表示パネルと1つの光電変換パネルとが、前記回転軸の周りに設定された三角柱の側面に沿って配置されている、請求項9に記載された表示装置。 The display device according to claim 9, wherein two different types of display panels and one photoelectric conversion panel are arranged along a side surface of a triangular prism set around the rotation axis.
  11.  前記異なる2種類の表示パネルは、2D表示用の表示パネルと3D表示用の表示パネルとで構成されている、請求項10に記載された表示装置。 11. The display device according to claim 10, wherein the two different types of display panels are configured by a display panel for 2D display and a display panel for 3D display.
  12.  前記表示パネルが1つの画面を構成し得るように並べられた、請求項4から11までの何れか一項に記載された複数の表示装置;及び、
     前記表示装置の切替機構をそれぞれ制御することによって、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替えて、前記複数の表示装置によって構成される画像表示エリアを変更する画像表示エリア変更部;を備えた、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    A plurality of display devices according to any one of claims 4 to 11, wherein the display panels are arranged so as to constitute one screen; and
    By controlling each of the switching mechanisms of the display device, the display panel is switched between a state where the display panel is disposed toward the front of the device and a state where the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the device. An image display area variable display comprising: an image display area changing unit that changes an image display area constituted by a display device.
  13.  前記装置前面に照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ;を備え、
     前記画像表示エリア変更部は、前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報に基づいて前記画像表示エリアを変更する、請求項12に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    A light receiving sensor for receiving external light applied to the front surface of the device;
    The image display area variable display according to claim 12, wherein the image display area changing unit changes the image display area based on light reception information obtained by the light receiving sensor.
  14.  前記受光センサは、前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの複数の位置に設けられている、請求項13に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 14. The image display area variable display according to claim 13, wherein the light receiving sensor is provided at a plurality of positions of the image display area variable display.
  15.  前記画像表示エリア変更部は、予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた位置において前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態になるように、前記画像表示エリアを変更する、請求項14に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area changing unit changes the image display area so that the photoelectric conversion panel is arranged toward the front of the apparatus at a position where light reception information exceeding a predetermined reference value is obtained. The image display area variable display according to claim 14.
  16.  前記画像表示エリア変更部は、予め定められた基準値を上回る受光情報が得られた前記受光センサの数が、予め定められた数よりも多くなった場合に、全ての表示装置の前記光電変換パネルを装置前面に向けて配置する、請求項14に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area changing unit is configured to output the photoelectric conversion of all display devices when the number of the light receiving sensors from which the light receiving information exceeding the predetermined reference value is obtained is larger than the predetermined number. 15. The image display area variable display according to claim 14, wherein the panel is arranged toward the front of the apparatus.
  17.  前記受光センサは、前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの装置前面において少なくとも中央部分に配置されており、
     前記画像表示エリア変更部は、前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの中央部分に配置された受光センサから得られた受光情報が予め定められた基準値を上回った場合に、全ての表示装置の前記光電変換パネルを装置前面に向けて配置する、請求項14に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    The light receiving sensor is disposed at least in a central portion on the front surface of the image display area variable display,
    The image display area changing unit is configured to detect the photoelectric conversion of all display devices when light reception information obtained from a light reception sensor disposed in a central portion of the image display area variable display exceeds a predetermined reference value. 15. The image display area variable display according to claim 14, wherein the panel is arranged toward the front of the apparatus.
  18.  前記画像表示エリア変更部は、受光センサから得られた受光情報が予め定められた時間に継続して前記基準値を上回った場合に、前記受光情報が前記基準値を上回った場合の所定の処理を行う、請求項15から17までの何れか一項に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area changing unit is configured to perform predetermined processing when the light reception information exceeds the reference value when the light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor continuously exceeds the reference value at a predetermined time. The image display area variable display according to any one of claims 15 to 17, wherein:
  19.  前記基準値は、予め定められた異なるタイミングにおいて前記受光センサによって得られた受光情報の差分に対して設定されている、請求項15から18までの何れか一項に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area variable according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein the reference value is set with respect to a difference between light reception information obtained by the light reception sensor at different predetermined timings. display.
  20.  前記受光センサは、前記表示装置にそれぞれ設けられた、請求項13から19までの何れか一項に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 20. The image display area variable display according to any one of claims 13 to 19, wherein the light receiving sensor is provided in each of the display devices.
  21.  前記受光センサは、前記複数の表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面を横断又は縦断するように設定された線に沿って配置されている、請求項13から19までの何れか一項に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 20. The light receiving sensor according to claim 13, wherein the light receiving sensor is arranged along a line set so as to cross or longitudinally cross the one screen configured by the plurality of display devices. Variable display area.
  22.  前記複数の表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面が略方形形状であり、
     前記受光センサは、前記1つの画面の四辺の対向した二辺の中間点を結ぶ線に沿って配置されている、請求項21に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    The one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices has a substantially square shape;
    The variable image display area display according to claim 21, wherein the light receiving sensor is arranged along a line connecting intermediate points of two opposite sides of the four sides of the one screen.
  23.  前記複数の表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面が略方形形状であり、
     前記受光センサは、前記1つの画面の四辺のうち対向した二辺に沿った周縁部に配置されている、請求項21に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    The one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices has a substantially square shape;
    The image display area variable display according to claim 21, wherein the light receiving sensor is arranged at a peripheral portion along two opposite sides of the four sides of the one screen.
  24.  前記複数の表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面が略方形形状であり、
     前記受光センサは、前記1つの画面の対角線に沿って配置されている、請求項21に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    The one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices has a substantially square shape;
    The variable image display area display according to claim 21, wherein the light receiving sensor is arranged along a diagonal line of the one screen.
  25.  前記画像表示エリア変更部は、前記受光センサのうち予め定められた基準となる受光センサによって得られた受光情報と、その他の受光センサによって得られた受光情報との差分を求め、当該差分に基づいて前記画像表示エリアを設定する、請求項14に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area changing unit obtains a difference between light reception information obtained by a predetermined light reception sensor of the light reception sensors and light reception information obtained by other light reception sensors, and based on the difference. The image display area variable display according to claim 14, wherein the image display area is set.
  26.  前記画像表示エリアを変更する時間が設定された画像表示エリア変更タイマー;を備え、
     前記画像表示エリア変更部は、前記画像表示エリア変更タイマーに基づいて、予め定められた時間帯において予め定められた画像表示エリアを設定する、請求項12に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    An image display area change timer in which a time for changing the image display area is set;
    13. The variable image display area display according to claim 12, wherein the image display area changing unit sets a predetermined image display area in a predetermined time zone based on the image display area change timer.
  27.  前記画像表示エリア変更部によって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、画像表示エリアに表示させる画像を変更する画像制御部;を備えた、請求項12から26までの何れか一項に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 27. The image control unit according to claim 12, further comprising: an image control unit that changes an image to be displayed in the image display area according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing unit. Image display area variable display.
  28.  前記画像制御部は、前記画像表示エリア変更部によって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、画像表示エリアに表示させる画像の大きさを変更する、請求項27に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area variable display according to claim 27, wherein the image control unit changes a size of an image to be displayed in the image display area according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing unit.
  29.  前記表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面の一部に表示される部分表示用画像を含んだ複数の画像を記憶した画像記憶部;を備え、
     前記画像制御部は、前記画像表示エリア変更部によって変更された画像表示エリアに基づいて、前記画像記憶部に記憶された複数の画像から前記画像表示エリアに表示させるのに適当な画像を前記画像表示エリアに表示する、請求項27又は28に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    An image storage unit storing a plurality of images including a partial display image displayed on a part of the one screen configured by the display device;
    The image control unit, based on the image display area changed by the image display area changing unit, displays an image suitable for displaying in the image display area from a plurality of images stored in the image storage unit. 29. The image display area variable display according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the display is a display area.
  30.  請求項27に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ;及び、
     前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイと相互に通信可能な外部処理装置;を備え、
     前記外部処理装置は、前記画像表示エリア変更部によって変更された画像表示エリアに応じて、当該画像表示エリアに表示する画像信号を前記画像制御部に送る、画像表示システム。
    An image display area variable display according to claim 27; and
    An external processing device capable of mutual communication with the image display area variable display;
    The external processing apparatus sends an image signal to be displayed in the image display area to the image control unit according to the image display area changed by the image display area changing unit.
  31.  前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイは、前記装置前面に照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ;を備え、
     前記外部処理装置は、前記受光センサから得られる受光情報に基づいて前記画像表示エリアに表示する画像信号を設定する、請求項30に記載された画像表示システム。
    The image display area variable display includes a light receiving sensor that receives external light irradiated on the front surface of the apparatus,
    The image display system according to claim 30, wherein the external processing device sets an image signal to be displayed in the image display area based on light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor.
  32.  前記外部処理装置は、前記画像表示エリアに表示する画像信号を変更するタイミングが設定された画像変更設定タイマーを備えた、請求項30に記載された画像表示システム。 The image display system according to claim 30, wherein the external processing device includes an image change setting timer in which a timing for changing an image signal to be displayed in the image display area is set.
  33.  請求項12に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイであって、
     前記複数の表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面に表示する画像情報が入力される画像情報入力部;を備え、
     前記画像表示エリア変更部は、前記画像情報入力部に入力された画像情報に基づいて、前記複数の表示装置によって構成される前記1つの画面に画像を表示する画像表示エリアを設定する、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。
    The image display area variable display according to claim 12,
    An image information input unit for inputting image information to be displayed on the one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices;
    The image display area changing unit sets an image display area for displaying an image on the one screen constituted by the plurality of display devices based on the image information input to the image information input unit. Variable area display.
  34.  前記画像表示エリア変更部は、前記複数の表示装置のうち、前記画像表示エリア内では表示装置の前記表示パネルを装置前面に向けて配置するとともに、前記画像表示エリアを除いたエリアでは表示装置の前記光電変換パネルを装置前面に向けて配置する、請求項33に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ。 The image display area changing unit arranges the display panel of the display device facing the front of the device in the image display area among the plurality of display devices, and the display device in an area excluding the image display area. 34. The image display area variable display according to claim 33, wherein the photoelectric conversion panel is arranged facing the front of the apparatus.
  35.  請求項33又は34に記載された画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイ;及び、
     前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイと相互に通信可能な外部処理装置;を備え、
     前記外部処理装置は、前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイに表示させる画像信号を前記画像情報入力部に送る、画像表示システム。
    An image display area variable display according to claim 33 or 34; and
    An external processing device capable of mutual communication with the image display area variable display;
    The external processing device sends an image signal to be displayed on the image display area variable display to the image information input unit.
  36.  前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイは、前記装置前面に照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ;を備え、
     前記外部処理装置は、前記受光センサから得られる受光情報に基づいて前記画像情報入力部に送る画像信号を設定する、請求項35に記載された画像表示システム。
    The image display area variable display includes a light receiving sensor that receives external light irradiated on the front surface of the apparatus,
    36. The image display system according to claim 35, wherein the external processing device sets an image signal to be sent to the image information input unit based on light reception information obtained from the light reception sensor.
  37.  前記外部処理装置は、前記画像情報入力部に送る画像信号を変更するタイミングが設定された画像変更設定タイマーを備えた、請求項35に記載された画像表示システム。 36. The image display system according to claim 35, wherein the external processing device includes an image change setting timer in which a timing for changing an image signal to be sent to the image information input unit is set.
  38.  画像を表示させる表示パネル;
     受光した光を電力に変換する光電変換パネル;
     装置前面の予め定められた領域において、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替える切替機構;及び、
     前記装置前面に照射される外部光を受光する受光センサ;を備えた表示装置の制御方法であって、
     前記受光センサによって受光情報を取得する受光情報取得ステップ;及び、
     前記受光情報取得ステップで取得された受光情報に基づいて、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態と、前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態とを切り替える切替ステップ;を備えた、表示装置の制御方法。
    Display panel for displaying images;
    Photoelectric conversion panel that converts received light into electric power;
    A switching mechanism that switches between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus in a predetermined region on the front of the apparatus; and
    A control method of a display device comprising: a light receiving sensor that receives external light irradiated on the front surface of the device,
    A light reception information acquisition step of acquiring light reception information by the light reception sensor; and
    A switching step of switching between a state in which the display panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus and a state in which the photoelectric conversion panel is disposed toward the front of the apparatus based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step; A display device control method comprising:
  39.  1つの画面を構成し得るように複数並べられた表示パネル;及び、前記複数の表示パネルに対して、それぞれ装置前面に向けて延びた直線に対して直交するように設けられた回転軸の周りに配置された光電変換パネル;を備えた画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御方法であって、
     前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの装置前面に照射される外部光を受光する受光センサによって受光情報を取得する受光情報取得ステップ;
     前記受光情報取得ステップにおいて取得された受光情報に基づいて、前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイに画像を表示する画像表示エリアを設定する画像表示エリア設定ステップ;及び、
     前記画像表示エリア設定ステップで設定された画像表示エリア内において、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態にするとともに、前記画像表示エリアを除いて前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態にする切替ステップ;を備えた、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御方法。
    A plurality of display panels arranged so as to constitute one screen; and a rotation axis provided to the plurality of display panels so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the front of the apparatus. A method for controlling an image display area variable display, comprising:
    A light reception information acquisition step of acquiring light reception information by a light reception sensor that receives external light applied to the front surface of the image display area variable display;
    An image display area setting step for setting an image display area for displaying an image on the image display area variable display based on the light reception information acquired in the light reception information acquisition step; and
    In the image display area set in the image display area setting step, the display panel is placed toward the front of the apparatus, and the photoelectric conversion panel is directed toward the front of the apparatus except for the image display area. A method for controlling an image display area variable display, comprising: a switching step for placing the image display area.
  40.  1つの画面を構成し得るように複数並べられた表示パネル;及び、前記複数の表示パネルに対して、それぞれ装置前面に向けて延びた直線に対して直交するように設けられた回転軸の周りに配置された光電変換パネル;を備えた画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御方法であって、
     前記画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイに表示する画像情報が入力される画像情報入力ステップ;
     前記画像情報入力ステップにおいて入力された画像情報に基づいて、前記複数の表示パネルによって構成される前記1つの画面に、画像を表示する画像表示エリアを設定する画像表示エリア設定ステップ;及び、
     前記画像表示エリア設定ステップで設定された画像表示エリアにおいて、前記表示パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態にするとともに、前記画像表示エリアを除いて前記光電変換パネルが装置前面に向けて配置された状態にする切替ステップ;を備えた、画像表示エリア可変ディスプレイの制御方法。
    A plurality of display panels arranged so as to constitute one screen; and a rotation axis provided to the plurality of display panels so as to be orthogonal to a straight line extending toward the front of the apparatus. A method for controlling an image display area variable display, comprising:
    An image information input step in which image information to be displayed on the image display area variable display is input;
    An image display area setting step for setting an image display area for displaying an image on the one screen constituted by the plurality of display panels based on the image information input in the image information input step; and
    In the image display area set in the image display area setting step, the display panel is placed toward the front of the apparatus, and the photoelectric conversion panel is placed toward the front of the apparatus except for the image display area. A method for controlling the image display area variable display.
PCT/JP2011/055345 2010-03-12 2011-03-08 Display device WO2011111691A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2010056283 2010-03-12
JP2010-056283 2010-03-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011111691A1 true WO2011111691A1 (en) 2011-09-15

Family

ID=44563492

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/055345 WO2011111691A1 (en) 2010-03-12 2011-03-08 Display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2011111691A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2013089808A (en) * 2011-10-19 2013-05-13 Adc Technology Inc Photovoltaic power generation device
US10093974B2 (en) 2009-03-27 2018-10-09 Life Technologies Corporation Methods and apparatus for single molecule sequencing using energy transfer detection
CN112967614A (en) * 2021-02-03 2021-06-15 王金电 Internet of things equipment based on high-definition LED display screen of meeting room

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6218726U (en) * 1985-07-15 1987-02-04
JP2004200911A (en) * 2002-12-17 2004-07-15 Fuji Film Microdevices Co Ltd Digital camera
JP2004317700A (en) * 2003-04-15 2004-11-11 Bridgestone Corp Image display device
JP2008011046A (en) * 2006-06-28 2008-01-17 Kyocera Corp Portable terminal
JP2008011052A (en) * 2006-06-28 2008-01-17 Kyocera Corp Portable terminal
JP2010026070A (en) * 2008-07-16 2010-02-04 Toppan Forms Co Ltd Building material with display device

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6218726U (en) * 1985-07-15 1987-02-04
JP2004200911A (en) * 2002-12-17 2004-07-15 Fuji Film Microdevices Co Ltd Digital camera
JP2004317700A (en) * 2003-04-15 2004-11-11 Bridgestone Corp Image display device
JP2008011046A (en) * 2006-06-28 2008-01-17 Kyocera Corp Portable terminal
JP2008011052A (en) * 2006-06-28 2008-01-17 Kyocera Corp Portable terminal
JP2010026070A (en) * 2008-07-16 2010-02-04 Toppan Forms Co Ltd Building material with display device

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10093974B2 (en) 2009-03-27 2018-10-09 Life Technologies Corporation Methods and apparatus for single molecule sequencing using energy transfer detection
JP2013089808A (en) * 2011-10-19 2013-05-13 Adc Technology Inc Photovoltaic power generation device
CN112967614A (en) * 2021-02-03 2021-06-15 王金电 Internet of things equipment based on high-definition LED display screen of meeting room

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2548232B1 (en) Photovoltaic cell device with switchable lighting
US8632201B2 (en) Display device with integrated photovoltaic cells, with improved luminosity
CN101828145B (en) Display with integrated photovoltaics
JP6195794B2 (en) Display device with integrated photovoltaic cell with improved brightness
US20080257399A1 (en) Bifacial thin film solar cell and method for making the same
WO2012004915A1 (en) Solar cell panel, liquid-crystal display system, and method for controlling a solar cell panel
WO2018019473A1 (en) Photovoltaic facade element
RU2610809C2 (en) Matrix display, variants thereof and method for manufacturing same
WO2011111691A1 (en) Display device
US20110048503A1 (en) Solar cell device, method for producing, and use
KR20170095818A (en) Polarising photovoltaic module built into the screen of an electronic display device
CN110596906A (en) Vertical projection system
CN106461924A (en) Display device with integrated photovoltaic cells with improved brightness and reflectivity
WO2011138847A1 (en) Display device, control method thereof, and image display system
GB2506430A (en) Building exterior façade display formed from combined OLED and PV solar panel.
WO2011111690A1 (en) Display device
WO2018019638A1 (en) Building facade or roof
WO2012032751A1 (en) Solar-cell panel, display device, and method for controlling solar-cell panel
WO2012005192A1 (en) Liquid crystal display device
Ravula et al. Solar window as an energy source: a patent study
CN209980714U (en) Solar advertising lamp box
TWI588589B (en) Projector with atomizing conductive structure and its application
JP7312882B2 (en) Information display device
WO2012060073A1 (en) Solar cell panel
KR20230053018A (en) Media realization building-intergrated solar module using LED transparent film

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11753349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11753349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP